1 \# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 \# Copyright 1996-2010 The NASM Authors - All Rights Reserved
4 \# See the file AUTHORS included with the NASM distribution for
5 \# the specific copyright holders.
7 \# Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
8 \# modification, are permitted provided that the following
11 \# * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
12 \# notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
13 \# * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
14 \# copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
15 \# disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
16 \# with the distribution.
18 \# THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
19 \# CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
20 \# INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
21 \# MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
22 \# DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
23 \# CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
24 \# SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
25 \# NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
26 \# LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
27 \# HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
28 \# CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
29 \# OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
30 \# EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
32 \# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
34 \# Source code to NASM documentation
36 \M{category}{Programming}
37 \M{title}{NASM - The Netwide Assembler}
39 \M{author}{The NASM Development Team}
40 \M{copyright_tail}{-- All Rights Reserved}
41 \M{license}{This document is redistributable under the license given in the file "LICENSE" distributed in the NASM archive.}
42 \M{auxinfo}{This release is dedicated to the memory of Charles A. Crayne. We miss you, Chuck.}
43 \M{summary}{This file documents NASM, the Netwide Assembler: an assembler targetting the Intel x86 series of processors, with portable source.}
46 \M{infotitle}{The Netwide Assembler for x86}
47 \M{epslogo}{nasmlogo.eps}
53 \IR{-MD} \c{-MD} option
54 \IR{-MF} \c{-MF} option
55 \IR{-MG} \c{-MG} option
56 \IR{-MP} \c{-MP} option
57 \IR{-MQ} \c{-MQ} option
58 \IR{-MT} \c{-MT} option
79 \IR{!=} \c{!=} operator
80 \IR{$, here} \c{$}, Here token
81 \IR{$, prefix} \c{$}, prefix
84 \IR{%%} \c{%%} operator
85 \IR{%+1} \c{%+1} and \c{%-1} syntax
87 \IR{%0} \c{%0} parameter count
89 \IR{&&} \c{&&} operator
91 \IR{..@} \c{..@} symbol prefix
93 \IR{//} \c{//} operator
95 \IR{<<} \c{<<} operator
96 \IR{<=} \c{<=} operator
97 \IR{<>} \c{<>} operator
99 \IR{==} \c{==} operator
100 \IR{>} \c{>} operator
101 \IR{>=} \c{>=} operator
102 \IR{>>} \c{>>} operator
103 \IR{?} \c{?} MASM syntax
104 \IR{^} \c{^} operator
105 \IR{^^} \c{^^} operator
106 \IR{|} \c{|} operator
107 \IR{||} \c{||} operator
108 \IR{~} \c{~} operator
109 \IR{%$} \c{%$} and \c{%$$} prefixes
111 \IR{+ opaddition} \c{+} operator, binary
112 \IR{+ opunary} \c{+} operator, unary
113 \IR{+ modifier} \c{+} modifier
114 \IR{- opsubtraction} \c{-} operator, binary
115 \IR{- opunary} \c{-} operator, unary
116 \IR{! opunary} \c{!} operator, unary
117 \IR{alignment, in bin sections} alignment, in \c{bin} sections
118 \IR{alignment, in elf sections} alignment, in \c{elf} sections
119 \IR{alignment, in win32 sections} alignment, in \c{win32} sections
120 \IR{alignment, of elf common variables} alignment, of \c{elf} common
122 \IR{alignment, in obj sections} alignment, in \c{obj} sections
123 \IR{a.out, bsd version} \c{a.out}, BSD version
124 \IR{a.out, linux version} \c{a.out}, Linux version
125 \IR{autoconf} Autoconf
127 \IR{bitwise and} bitwise AND
128 \IR{bitwise or} bitwise OR
129 \IR{bitwise xor} bitwise XOR
130 \IR{block ifs} block IFs
131 \IR{borland pascal} Borland, Pascal
132 \IR{borland's win32 compilers} Borland, Win32 compilers
133 \IR{braces, after % sign} braces, after \c{%} sign
135 \IR{c calling convention} C calling convention
136 \IR{c symbol names} C symbol names
137 \IA{critical expressions}{critical expression}
138 \IA{command line}{command-line}
139 \IA{case sensitivity}{case sensitive}
140 \IA{case-sensitive}{case sensitive}
141 \IA{case-insensitive}{case sensitive}
142 \IA{character constants}{character constant}
143 \IR{common object file format} Common Object File Format
144 \IR{common variables, alignment in elf} common variables, alignment
146 \IR{common, elf extensions to} \c{COMMON}, \c{elf} extensions to
147 \IR{common, obj extensions to} \c{COMMON}, \c{obj} extensions to
148 \IR{declaring structure} declaring structures
149 \IR{default-wrt mechanism} default-\c{WRT} mechanism
152 \IR{dll symbols, exporting} DLL symbols, exporting
153 \IR{dll symbols, importing} DLL symbols, importing
155 \IR{dos archive} DOS archive
156 \IR{dos source archive} DOS source archive
157 \IA{effective address}{effective addresses}
158 \IA{effective-address}{effective addresses}
160 \IR{elf, 16-bit code and} ELF, 16-bit code and
161 \IR{elf shared libraries} ELF, shared libraries
164 \IR{executable and linkable format} Executable and Linkable Format
165 \IR{extern, obj extensions to} \c{EXTERN}, \c{obj} extensions to
166 \IR{extern, rdf extensions to} \c{EXTERN}, \c{rdf} extensions to
167 \IR{floating-point, constants} floating-point, constants
168 \IR{floating-point, packed bcd constants} floating-point, packed BCD constants
170 \IR{freelink} FreeLink
171 \IR{functions, c calling convention} functions, C calling convention
172 \IR{functions, pascal calling convention} functions, Pascal calling
174 \IR{global, aoutb extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{aoutb} extensions to
175 \IR{global, elf extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{elf} extensions to
176 \IR{global, rdf extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{rdf} extensions to
178 \IR{got relocations} \c{GOT} relocations
179 \IR{gotoff relocation} \c{GOTOFF} relocations
180 \IR{gotpc relocation} \c{GOTPC} relocations
181 \IR{intel number formats} Intel number formats
182 \IR{linux, elf} Linux, ELF
183 \IR{linux, a.out} Linux, \c{a.out}
184 \IR{linux, as86} Linux, \c{as86}
185 \IR{logical and} logical AND
186 \IR{logical or} logical OR
187 \IR{logical xor} logical XOR
188 \IR{mach object file format} Mach, object file format
190 \IR{macho32} \c{macho32}
191 \IR{macho64} \c{macho64}
194 \IA{memory reference}{memory references}
196 \IA{misc directory}{misc subdirectory}
197 \IR{misc subdirectory} \c{misc} subdirectory
198 \IR{microsoft omf} Microsoft OMF
199 \IR{mmx registers} MMX registers
200 \IA{modr/m}{modr/m byte}
201 \IR{modr/m byte} ModR/M byte
203 \IR{ms-dos device drivers} MS-DOS device drivers
204 \IR{multipush} \c{multipush} macro
206 \IR{nasm version} NASM version
210 \IR{operating system} operating system
212 \IR{pascal calling convention}Pascal calling convention
213 \IR{passes} passes, assembly
218 \IR{plt} \c{PLT} relocations
219 \IA{pre-defining macros}{pre-define}
220 \IA{preprocessor expressions}{preprocessor, expressions}
221 \IA{preprocessor loops}{preprocessor, loops}
222 \IA{preprocessor variables}{preprocessor, variables}
223 \IA{rdoff subdirectory}{rdoff}
224 \IR{rdoff} \c{rdoff} subdirectory
225 \IR{relocatable dynamic object file format} Relocatable Dynamic
227 \IR{relocations, pic-specific} relocations, PIC-specific
228 \IA{repeating}{repeating code}
229 \IR{section alignment, in elf} section alignment, in \c{elf}
230 \IR{section alignment, in bin} section alignment, in \c{bin}
231 \IR{section alignment, in obj} section alignment, in \c{obj}
232 \IR{section alignment, in win32} section alignment, in \c{win32}
233 \IR{section, elf extensions to} \c{SECTION}, \c{elf} extensions to
234 \IR{section, win32 extensions to} \c{SECTION}, \c{win32} extensions to
235 \IR{segment alignment, in bin} segment alignment, in \c{bin}
236 \IR{segment alignment, in obj} segment alignment, in \c{obj}
237 \IR{segment, obj extensions to} \c{SEGMENT}, \c{elf} extensions to
238 \IR{segment names, borland pascal} segment names, Borland Pascal
239 \IR{shift command} \c{shift} command
241 \IR{sib byte} SIB byte
242 \IR{align, smart} \c{ALIGN}, smart
243 \IR{solaris x86} Solaris x86
244 \IA{standard section names}{standardized section names}
245 \IR{symbols, exporting from dlls} symbols, exporting from DLLs
246 \IR{symbols, importing from dlls} symbols, importing from DLLs
247 \IR{test subdirectory} \c{test} subdirectory
249 \IR{underscore, in c symbols} underscore, in C symbols
255 \IA{sco unix}{unix, sco}
256 \IR{unix, sco} Unix, SCO
257 \IA{unix source archive}{unix, source archive}
258 \IR{unix, source archive} Unix, source archive
259 \IA{unix system v}{unix, system v}
260 \IR{unix, system v} Unix, System V
261 \IR{unixware} UnixWare
263 \IR{version number of nasm} version number of NASM
264 \IR{visual c++} Visual C++
265 \IR{www page} WWW page
269 \IR{windows 95} Windows 95
270 \IR{windows nt} Windows NT
271 \# \IC{program entry point}{entry point, program}
272 \# \IC{program entry point}{start point, program}
273 \# \IC{MS-DOS device drivers}{device drivers, MS-DOS}
274 \# \IC{16-bit mode, versus 32-bit mode}{32-bit mode, versus 16-bit mode}
275 \# \IC{c symbol names}{symbol names, in C}
278 \C{intro} Introduction
280 \H{whatsnasm} What Is NASM?
282 The Netwide Assembler, NASM, is an 80x86 and x86-64 assembler designed
283 for portability and modularity. It supports a range of object file
284 formats, including Linux and \c{*BSD} \c{a.out}, \c{ELF}, \c{COFF},
285 \c{Mach-O}, Microsoft 16-bit \c{OBJ}, \c{Win32} and \c{Win64}. It will
286 also output plain binary files. Its syntax is designed to be simple
287 and easy to understand, similar to Intel's but less complex. It
288 supports all currently known x86 architectural extensions, and has
289 strong support for macros.
292 \S{yaasm} Why Yet Another Assembler?
294 The Netwide Assembler grew out of an idea on \i\c{comp.lang.asm.x86}
295 (or possibly \i\c{alt.lang.asm} - I forget which), which was
296 essentially that there didn't seem to be a good \e{free} x86-series
297 assembler around, and that maybe someone ought to write one.
299 \b \i\c{a86} is good, but not free, and in particular you don't get any
300 32-bit capability until you pay. It's DOS only, too.
302 \b \i\c{gas} is free, and ports over to DOS and Unix, but it's not
303 very good, since it's designed to be a back end to \i\c{gcc}, which
304 always feeds it correct code. So its error checking is minimal. Also,
305 its syntax is horrible, from the point of view of anyone trying to
306 actually \e{write} anything in it. Plus you can't write 16-bit code in
309 \b \i\c{as86} is specific to Minix and Linux, and (my version at least)
310 doesn't seem to have much (or any) documentation.
312 \b \i\c{MASM} isn't very good, and it's (was) expensive, and it runs only under
315 \b \i\c{TASM} is better, but still strives for MASM compatibility,
316 which means millions of directives and tons of red tape. And its syntax
317 is essentially MASM's, with the contradictions and quirks that
318 entails (although it sorts out some of those by means of Ideal mode.)
319 It's expensive too. And it's DOS-only.
321 So here, for your coding pleasure, is NASM. At present it's
322 still in prototype stage - we don't promise that it can outperform
323 any of these assemblers. But please, \e{please} send us bug reports,
324 fixes, helpful information, and anything else you can get your hands
325 on (and thanks to the many people who've done this already! You all
326 know who you are), and we'll improve it out of all recognition.
330 \S{legal} \i{License} Conditions
332 Please see the file \c{LICENSE}, supplied as part of any NASM
333 distribution archive, for the license conditions under which you may
334 use NASM. NASM is now under the so-called 2-clause BSD license, also
335 known as the simplified BSD license.
337 Copyright 1996-2010 the NASM Authors - All rights reserved.
339 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
340 modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
343 \b Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
344 notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
346 \b Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
347 notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
348 documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
350 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
351 CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
352 INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
353 MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
354 DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
355 CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
356 SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
357 NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
358 LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
359 HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
360 CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
361 OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
362 EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
365 \H{contact} Contact Information
367 The current version of NASM (since about 0.98.08) is maintained by a
368 team of developers, accessible through the \c{nasm-devel} mailing list
369 (see below for the link).
370 If you want to report a bug, please read \k{bugs} first.
372 NASM has a \i{website} at
373 \W{http://www.nasm.us/}\c{http://www.nasm.us/}. If it's not there,
376 \i{New releases}, \i{release candidates}, and \I{snapshots, daily
377 development}\i{daily development snapshots} of NASM are available from
378 the official web site.
380 Announcements are posted to
381 \W{news:comp.lang.asm.x86}\i\c{comp.lang.asm.x86},
383 \W{http://www.freshmeat.net/}\c{http://www.freshmeat.net/}.
385 If you want information about the current development status, please
386 subscribe to the \i\c{nasm-devel} email list; see link from the
390 \H{install} Installation
392 \S{instdos} \i{Installing} NASM under MS-\i{DOS} or Windows
394 Once you've obtained the appropriate archive for NASM,
395 \i\c{nasm-XXX-dos.zip} or \i\c{nasm-XXX-win32.zip} (where \c{XXX}
396 denotes the version number of NASM contained in the archive), unpack
397 it into its own directory (for example \c{c:\\nasm}).
399 The archive will contain a set of executable files: the NASM
400 executable file \i\c{nasm.exe}, the NDISASM executable file
401 \i\c{ndisasm.exe}, and possibly additional utilities to handle the
404 The only file NASM needs to run is its own executable, so copy
405 \c{nasm.exe} to a directory on your PATH, or alternatively edit
406 \i\c{autoexec.bat} to add the \c{nasm} directory to your
407 \i\c{PATH} (to do that under Windows XP, go to Start > Control Panel >
408 System > Advanced > Environment Variables; these instructions may work
409 under other versions of Windows as well.)
411 That's it - NASM is installed. You don't need the nasm directory
412 to be present to run NASM (unless you've added it to your \c{PATH}),
413 so you can delete it if you need to save space; however, you may
414 want to keep the documentation or test programs.
416 If you've downloaded the \i{DOS source archive}, \i\c{nasm-XXX.zip},
417 the \c{nasm} directory will also contain the full NASM \i{source
418 code}, and a selection of \i{Makefiles} you can (hopefully) use to
419 rebuild your copy of NASM from scratch. See the file \c{INSTALL} in
422 Note that a number of files are generated from other files by Perl
423 scripts. Although the NASM source distribution includes these
424 generated files, you will need to rebuild them (and hence, will need a
425 Perl interpreter) if you change insns.dat, standard.mac or the
426 documentation. It is possible future source distributions may not
427 include these files at all. Ports of \i{Perl} for a variety of
428 platforms, including DOS and Windows, are available from
429 \W{http://www.cpan.org/ports/}\i{www.cpan.org}.
432 \S{instdos} Installing NASM under \i{Unix}
434 Once you've obtained the \i{Unix source archive} for NASM,
435 \i\c{nasm-XXX.tar.gz} (where \c{XXX} denotes the version number of
436 NASM contained in the archive), unpack it into a directory such
437 as \c{/usr/local/src}. The archive, when unpacked, will create its
438 own subdirectory \c{nasm-XXX}.
440 NASM is an \I{Autoconf}\I\c{configure}auto-configuring package: once
441 you've unpacked it, \c{cd} to the directory it's been unpacked into
442 and type \c{./configure}. This shell script will find the best C
443 compiler to use for building NASM and set up \i{Makefiles}
446 Once NASM has auto-configured, you can type \i\c{make} to build the
447 \c{nasm} and \c{ndisasm} binaries, and then \c{make install} to
448 install them in \c{/usr/local/bin} and install the \i{man pages}
449 \i\c{nasm.1} and \i\c{ndisasm.1} in \c{/usr/local/man/man1}.
450 Alternatively, you can give options such as \c{--prefix} to the
451 configure script (see the file \i\c{INSTALL} for more details), or
452 install the programs yourself.
454 NASM also comes with a set of utilities for handling the \c{RDOFF}
455 custom object-file format, which are in the \i\c{rdoff} subdirectory
456 of the NASM archive. You can build these with \c{make rdf} and
457 install them with \c{make rdf_install}, if you want them.
460 \C{running} Running NASM
462 \H{syntax} NASM \i{Command-Line} Syntax
464 To assemble a file, you issue a command of the form
466 \c nasm -f <format> <filename> [-o <output>]
470 \c nasm -f elf myfile.asm
472 will assemble \c{myfile.asm} into an \c{ELF} object file \c{myfile.o}. And
474 \c nasm -f bin myfile.asm -o myfile.com
476 will assemble \c{myfile.asm} into a raw binary file \c{myfile.com}.
478 To produce a listing file, with the hex codes output from NASM
479 displayed on the left of the original sources, use the \c{-l} option
480 to give a listing file name, for example:
482 \c nasm -f coff myfile.asm -l myfile.lst
484 To get further usage instructions from NASM, try typing
488 As \c{-hf}, this will also list the available output file formats, and what they
491 If you use Linux but aren't sure whether your system is \c{a.out}
496 (in the directory in which you put the NASM binary when you
497 installed it). If it says something like
499 \c nasm: ELF 32-bit LSB executable i386 (386 and up) Version 1
501 then your system is \c{ELF}, and you should use the option \c{-f elf}
502 when you want NASM to produce Linux object files. If it says
504 \c nasm: Linux/i386 demand-paged executable (QMAGIC)
506 or something similar, your system is \c{a.out}, and you should use
507 \c{-f aout} instead (Linux \c{a.out} systems have long been obsolete,
508 and are rare these days.)
510 Like Unix compilers and assemblers, NASM is silent unless it
511 goes wrong: you won't see any output at all, unless it gives error
515 \S{opt-o} The \i\c{-o} Option: Specifying the Output File Name
517 NASM will normally choose the name of your output file for you;
518 precisely how it does this is dependent on the object file format.
519 For Microsoft object file formats (\c{obj}, \c{win32} and \c{win64}),
520 it will remove the \c{.asm} \i{extension} (or whatever extension you
521 like to use - NASM doesn't care) from your source file name and
522 substitute \c{.obj}. For Unix object file formats (\c{aout}, \c{as86},
523 \c{coff}, \c{elf32}, \c{elf64}, \c{ieee}, \c{macho32} and \c{macho64})
524 it will substitute \c{.o}. For \c{dbg}, \c{rdf}, \c{ith} and \c{srec},
525 it will use \c{.dbg}, \c{.rdf}, \c{.ith} and \c{.srec}, respectively,
526 and for the \c{bin} format it will simply remove the extension, so
527 that \c{myfile.asm} produces the output file \c{myfile}.
529 If the output file already exists, NASM will overwrite it, unless it
530 has the same name as the input file, in which case it will give a
531 warning and use \i\c{nasm.out} as the output file name instead.
533 For situations in which this behaviour is unacceptable, NASM
534 provides the \c{-o} command-line option, which allows you to specify
535 your desired output file name. You invoke \c{-o} by following it
536 with the name you wish for the output file, either with or without
537 an intervening space. For example:
539 \c nasm -f bin program.asm -o program.com
540 \c nasm -f bin driver.asm -odriver.sys
542 Note that this is a small o, and is different from a capital O , which
543 is used to specify the number of optimisation passes required. See \k{opt-O}.
546 \S{opt-f} The \i\c{-f} Option: Specifying the \i{Output File Format}
548 If you do not supply the \c{-f} option to NASM, it will choose an
549 output file format for you itself. In the distribution versions of
550 NASM, the default is always \i\c{bin}; if you've compiled your own
551 copy of NASM, you can redefine \i\c{OF_DEFAULT} at compile time and
552 choose what you want the default to be.
554 Like \c{-o}, the intervening space between \c{-f} and the output
555 file format is optional; so \c{-f elf} and \c{-felf} are both valid.
557 A complete list of the available output file formats can be given by
558 issuing the command \i\c{nasm -hf}.
561 \S{opt-l} The \i\c{-l} Option: Generating a \i{Listing File}
563 If you supply the \c{-l} option to NASM, followed (with the usual
564 optional space) by a file name, NASM will generate a
565 \i{source-listing file} for you, in which addresses and generated
566 code are listed on the left, and the actual source code, with
567 expansions of multi-line macros (except those which specifically
568 request no expansion in source listings: see \k{nolist}) on the
571 \c nasm -f elf myfile.asm -l myfile.lst
573 If a list file is selected, you may turn off listing for a
574 section of your source with \c{[list -]}, and turn it back on
575 with \c{[list +]}, (the default, obviously). There is no "user
576 form" (without the brackets). This can be used to list only
577 sections of interest, avoiding excessively long listings.
580 \S{opt-M} The \i\c{-M} Option: Generate \i{Makefile Dependencies}
582 This option can be used to generate makefile dependencies on stdout.
583 This can be redirected to a file for further processing. For example:
585 \c nasm -M myfile.asm > myfile.dep
588 \S{opt-MG} The \i\c{-MG} Option: Generate \i{Makefile Dependencies}
590 This option can be used to generate makefile dependencies on stdout.
591 This differs from the \c{-M} option in that if a nonexisting file is
592 encountered, it is assumed to be a generated file and is added to the
593 dependency list without a prefix.
596 \S{opt-MF} The \i\c\{-MF} Option: Set Makefile Dependency File
598 This option can be used with the \c{-M} or \c{-MG} options to send the
599 output to a file, rather than to stdout. For example:
601 \c nasm -M -MF myfile.dep myfile.asm
604 \S{opt-MD} The \i\c{-MD} Option: Assemble and Generate Dependencies
606 The \c{-MD} option acts as the combination of the \c{-M} and \c{-MF}
607 options (i.e. a filename has to be specified.) However, unlike the
608 \c{-M} or \c{-MG} options, \c{-MD} does \e{not} inhibit the normal
609 operation of the assembler. Use this to automatically generate
610 updated dependencies with every assembly session. For example:
612 \c nasm -f elf -o myfile.o -MD myfile.dep myfile.asm
615 \S{opt-MT} The \i\c{-MT} Option: Dependency Target Name
617 The \c{-MT} option can be used to override the default name of the
618 dependency target. This is normally the same as the output filename,
619 specified by the \c{-o} option.
622 \S{opt-MQ} The \i\c{-MQ} Option: Dependency Target Name (Quoted)
624 The \c{-MQ} option acts as the \c{-MT} option, except it tries to
625 quote characters that have special meaning in Makefile syntax. This
626 is not foolproof, as not all characters with special meaning are
630 \S{opt-MP} The \i\c{-MP} Option: Emit phony targets
632 When used with any of the dependency generation options, the \c{-MP}
633 option causes NASM to emit a phony target without dependencies for
634 each header file. This prevents Make from complaining if a header
635 file has been removed.
638 \S{opt-F} The \i\c{-F} Option: Selecting a \i{Debug Information Format}
640 This option is used to select the format of the debug information
641 emitted into the output file, to be used by a debugger (or \e{will}
642 be). Prior to version 2.03.01, the use of this switch did \e{not} enable
643 output of the selected debug info format. Use \c{-g}, see \k{opt-g},
644 to enable output. Versions 2.03.01 and later automatically enable \c{-g}
645 if \c{-F} is specified.
647 A complete list of the available debug file formats for an output
648 format can be seen by issuing the command \c{nasm -f <format> -y}. Not
649 all output formats currently support debugging output. See \k{opt-y}.
651 This should not be confused with the \c{-f dbg} output format option which
652 is not built into NASM by default. For information on how
653 to enable it when building from the sources, see \k{dbgfmt}.
656 \S{opt-g} The \i\c{-g} Option: Enabling \i{Debug Information}.
658 This option can be used to generate debugging information in the specified
659 format. See \k{opt-F}. Using \c{-g} without \c{-F} results in emitting
660 debug info in the default format, if any, for the selected output format.
661 If no debug information is currently implemented in the selected output
662 format, \c{-g} is \e{silently ignored}.
665 \S{opt-X} The \i\c{-X} Option: Selecting an \i{Error Reporting Format}
667 This option can be used to select an error reporting format for any
668 error messages that might be produced by NASM.
670 Currently, two error reporting formats may be selected. They are
671 the \c{-Xvc} option and the \c{-Xgnu} option. The GNU format is
672 the default and looks like this:
674 \c filename.asm:65: error: specific error message
676 where \c{filename.asm} is the name of the source file in which the
677 error was detected, \c{65} is the source file line number on which
678 the error was detected, \c{error} is the severity of the error (this
679 could be \c{warning}), and \c{specific error message} is a more
680 detailed text message which should help pinpoint the exact problem.
682 The other format, specified by \c{-Xvc} is the style used by Microsoft
683 Visual C++ and some other programs. It looks like this:
685 \c filename.asm(65) : error: specific error message
687 where the only difference is that the line number is in parentheses
688 instead of being delimited by colons.
690 See also the \c{Visual C++} output format, \k{win32fmt}.
692 \S{opt-Z} The \i\c{-Z} Option: Send Errors to a File
694 Under \I{DOS}\c{MS-DOS} it can be difficult (though there are ways) to
695 redirect the standard-error output of a program to a file. Since
696 NASM usually produces its warning and \i{error messages} on
697 \i\c{stderr}, this can make it hard to capture the errors if (for
698 example) you want to load them into an editor.
700 NASM therefore provides the \c{-Z} option, taking a filename argument
701 which causes errors to be sent to the specified files rather than
702 standard error. Therefore you can \I{redirecting errors}redirect
703 the errors into a file by typing
705 \c nasm -Z myfile.err -f obj myfile.asm
707 In earlier versions of NASM, this option was called \c{-E}, but it was
708 changed since \c{-E} is an option conventionally used for
709 preprocessing only, with disastrous results. See \k{opt-E}.
711 \S{opt-s} The \i\c{-s} Option: Send Errors to \i\c{stdout}
713 The \c{-s} option redirects \i{error messages} to \c{stdout} rather
714 than \c{stderr}, so it can be redirected under \I{DOS}\c{MS-DOS}. To
715 assemble the file \c{myfile.asm} and pipe its output to the \c{more}
716 program, you can type:
718 \c nasm -s -f obj myfile.asm | more
720 See also the \c{-Z} option, \k{opt-Z}.
723 \S{opt-i} The \i\c{-i}\I\c{-I} Option: Include File Search Directories
725 When NASM sees the \i\c{%include} or \i\c{%pathsearch} directive in a
726 source file (see \k{include}, \k{pathsearch} or \k{incbin}), it will
727 search for the given file not only in the current directory, but also
728 in any directories specified on the command line by the use of the
729 \c{-i} option. Therefore you can include files from a \i{macro
730 library}, for example, by typing
732 \c nasm -ic:\macrolib\ -f obj myfile.asm
734 (As usual, a space between \c{-i} and the path name is allowed, and
737 NASM, in the interests of complete source-code portability, does not
738 understand the file naming conventions of the OS it is running on;
739 the string you provide as an argument to the \c{-i} option will be
740 prepended exactly as written to the name of the include file.
741 Therefore the trailing backslash in the above example is necessary.
742 Under Unix, a trailing forward slash is similarly necessary.
744 (You can use this to your advantage, if you're really \i{perverse},
745 by noting that the option \c{-ifoo} will cause \c{%include "bar.i"}
746 to search for the file \c{foobar.i}...)
748 If you want to define a \e{standard} \i{include search path},
749 similar to \c{/usr/include} on Unix systems, you should place one or
750 more \c{-i} directives in the \c{NASMENV} environment variable (see
753 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
754 be specified as \c{-I}.
757 \S{opt-p} The \i\c{-p}\I\c{-P} Option: \I{pre-including files}Pre-Include a File
759 \I\c{%include}NASM allows you to specify files to be
760 \e{pre-included} into your source file, by the use of the \c{-p}
763 \c nasm myfile.asm -p myinc.inc
765 is equivalent to running \c{nasm myfile.asm} and placing the
766 directive \c{%include "myinc.inc"} at the start of the file.
768 For consistency with the \c{-I}, \c{-D} and \c{-U} options, this
769 option can also be specified as \c{-P}.
772 \S{opt-d} The \i\c{-d}\I\c{-D} Option: \I{pre-defining macros}Pre-Define a Macro
774 \I\c{%define}Just as the \c{-p} option gives an alternative to placing
775 \c{%include} directives at the start of a source file, the \c{-d}
776 option gives an alternative to placing a \c{%define} directive. You
779 \c nasm myfile.asm -dFOO=100
781 as an alternative to placing the directive
785 at the start of the file. You can miss off the macro value, as well:
786 the option \c{-dFOO} is equivalent to coding \c{%define FOO}. This
787 form of the directive may be useful for selecting \i{assembly-time
788 options} which are then tested using \c{%ifdef}, for example
791 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
792 be specified as \c{-D}.
795 \S{opt-u} The \i\c{-u}\I\c{-U} Option: \I{Undefining macros}Undefine a Macro
797 \I\c{%undef}The \c{-u} option undefines a macro that would otherwise
798 have been pre-defined, either automatically or by a \c{-p} or \c{-d}
799 option specified earlier on the command lines.
801 For example, the following command line:
803 \c nasm myfile.asm -dFOO=100 -uFOO
805 would result in \c{FOO} \e{not} being a predefined macro in the
806 program. This is useful to override options specified at a different
809 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
810 be specified as \c{-U}.
813 \S{opt-E} The \i\c{-E}\I{-e} Option: Preprocess Only
815 NASM allows the \i{preprocessor} to be run on its own, up to a
816 point. Using the \c{-E} option (which requires no arguments) will
817 cause NASM to preprocess its input file, expand all the macro
818 references, remove all the comments and preprocessor directives, and
819 print the resulting file on standard output (or save it to a file,
820 if the \c{-o} option is also used).
822 This option cannot be applied to programs which require the
823 preprocessor to evaluate \I{preprocessor expressions}\i{expressions}
824 which depend on the values of symbols: so code such as
826 \c %assign tablesize ($-tablestart)
828 will cause an error in \i{preprocess-only mode}.
830 For compatiblity with older version of NASM, this option can also be
831 written \c{-e}. \c{-E} in older versions of NASM was the equivalent
832 of the current \c{-Z} option, \k{opt-Z}.
834 \S{opt-a} The \i\c{-a} Option: Don't Preprocess At All
836 If NASM is being used as the back end to a compiler, it might be
837 desirable to \I{suppressing preprocessing}suppress preprocessing
838 completely and assume the compiler has already done it, to save time
839 and increase compilation speeds. The \c{-a} option, requiring no
840 argument, instructs NASM to replace its powerful \i{preprocessor}
841 with a \i{stub preprocessor} which does nothing.
844 \S{opt-O} The \i\c{-O} Option: Specifying \i{Multipass Optimization}
846 NASM defaults to not optimizing operands which can fit into a signed byte.
847 This means that if you want the shortest possible object code,
848 you have to enable optimization.
850 Using the \c{-O} option, you can tell NASM to carry out different
851 levels of optimization. The syntax is:
853 \b \c{-O0}: No optimization. All operands take their long forms,
854 if a short form is not specified, except conditional jumps.
855 This is intended to match NASM 0.98 behavior.
857 \b \c{-O1}: Minimal optimization. As above, but immediate operands
858 which will fit in a signed byte are optimized,
859 unless the long form is specified. Conditional jumps default
860 to the long form unless otherwise specified.
862 \b \c{-Ox} (where \c{x} is the actual letter \c{x}): Multipass optimization.
863 Minimize branch offsets and signed immediate bytes,
864 overriding size specification unless the \c{strict} keyword
865 has been used (see \k{strict}). For compatability with earlier
866 releases, the letter \c{x} may also be any number greater than
867 one. This number has no effect on the actual number of passes.
869 The \c{-Ox} mode is recommended for most uses.
871 Note that this is a capital \c{O}, and is different from a small \c{o}, which
872 is used to specify the output file name. See \k{opt-o}.
875 \S{opt-t} The \i\c{-t} Option: Enable TASM Compatibility Mode
877 NASM includes a limited form of compatibility with Borland's \i\c{TASM}.
878 When NASM's \c{-t} option is used, the following changes are made:
880 \b local labels may be prefixed with \c{@@} instead of \c{.}
882 \b size override is supported within brackets. In TASM compatible mode,
883 a size override inside square brackets changes the size of the operand,
884 and not the address type of the operand as it does in NASM syntax. E.g.
885 \c{mov eax,[DWORD val]} is valid syntax in TASM compatibility mode.
886 Note that you lose the ability to override the default address type for
889 \b unprefixed forms of some directives supported (\c{arg}, \c{elif},
890 \c{else}, \c{endif}, \c{if}, \c{ifdef}, \c{ifdifi}, \c{ifndef},
891 \c{include}, \c{local})
893 \S{opt-w} The \i\c{-w} and \i\c{-W} Options: Enable or Disable Assembly \i{Warnings}
895 NASM can observe many conditions during the course of assembly which
896 are worth mentioning to the user, but not a sufficiently severe
897 error to justify NASM refusing to generate an output file. These
898 conditions are reported like errors, but come up with the word
899 `warning' before the message. Warnings do not prevent NASM from
900 generating an output file and returning a success status to the
903 Some conditions are even less severe than that: they are only
904 sometimes worth mentioning to the user. Therefore NASM supports the
905 \c{-w} command-line option, which enables or disables certain
906 classes of assembly warning. Such warning classes are described by a
907 name, for example \c{orphan-labels}; you can enable warnings of
908 this class by the command-line option \c{-w+orphan-labels} and
909 disable it by \c{-w-orphan-labels}.
911 The \i{suppressible warning} classes are:
913 \b \i\c{macro-params} covers warnings about \i{multi-line macros}
914 being invoked with the wrong number of parameters. This warning
915 class is enabled by default; see \k{mlmacover} for an example of why
916 you might want to disable it.
918 \b \i\c{macro-selfref} warns if a macro references itself. This
919 warning class is disabled by default.
921 \b\i\c{macro-defaults} warns when a macro has more default
922 parameters than optional parameters. This warning class
923 is enabled by default; see \k{mlmacdef} for why you might want to disable it.
925 \b \i\c{orphan-labels} covers warnings about source lines which
926 contain no instruction but define a label without a trailing colon.
927 NASM warns about this somewhat obscure condition by default;
928 see \k{syntax} for more information.
930 \b \i\c{number-overflow} covers warnings about numeric constants which
931 don't fit in 64 bits. This warning class is enabled by default.
933 \b \i\c{gnu-elf-extensions} warns if 8-bit or 16-bit relocations
934 are used in \c{-f elf} format. The GNU extensions allow this.
935 This warning class is disabled by default.
937 \b \i\c{float-overflow} warns about floating point overflow.
940 \b \i\c{float-denorm} warns about floating point denormals.
943 \b \i\c{float-underflow} warns about floating point underflow.
946 \b \i\c{float-toolong} warns about too many digits in floating-point numbers.
949 \b \i\c{user} controls \c{%warning} directives (see \k{pperror}).
952 \b \i\c{error} causes warnings to be treated as errors. Disabled by
955 \b \i\c{all} is an alias for \e{all} suppressible warning classes (not
956 including \c{error}). Thus, \c{-w+all} enables all available warnings.
958 In addition, you can set warning classes across sections.
959 Warning classes may be enabled with \i\c{[warning +warning-name]},
960 disabled with \i\c{[warning -warning-name]} or reset to their
961 original value with \i\c{[warning *warning-name]}. No "user form"
962 (without the brackets) exists.
964 Since version 2.00, NASM has also supported the gcc-like syntax
965 \c{-Wwarning} and \c{-Wno-warning} instead of \c{-w+warning} and
966 \c{-w-warning}, respectively.
969 \S{opt-v} The \i\c{-v} Option: Display \i{Version} Info
971 Typing \c{NASM -v} will display the version of NASM which you are using,
972 and the date on which it was compiled.
974 You will need the version number if you report a bug.
976 \S{opt-y} The \i\c{-y} Option: Display Available Debug Info Formats
978 Typing \c{nasm -f <option> -y} will display a list of the available
979 debug info formats for the given output format. The default format
980 is indicated by an asterisk. For example:
984 \c valid debug formats for 'elf32' output format are
985 \c ('*' denotes default):
986 \c * stabs ELF32 (i386) stabs debug format for Linux
987 \c dwarf elf32 (i386) dwarf debug format for Linux
990 \S{opt-pfix} The \i\c{--prefix} and \i\c{--postfix} Options.
992 The \c{--prefix} and \c{--postfix} options prepend or append
993 (respectively) the given argument to all \c{global} or
994 \c{extern} variables. E.g. \c{--prefix _} will prepend the
995 underscore to all global and external variables, as C sometimes
996 (but not always) likes it.
999 \S{nasmenv} The \i\c{NASMENV} \i{Environment} Variable
1001 If you define an environment variable called \c{NASMENV}, the program
1002 will interpret it as a list of extra command-line options, which are
1003 processed before the real command line. You can use this to define
1004 standard search directories for include files, by putting \c{-i}
1005 options in the \c{NASMENV} variable.
1007 The value of the variable is split up at white space, so that the
1008 value \c{-s -ic:\\nasmlib\\} will be treated as two separate options.
1009 However, that means that the value \c{-dNAME="my name"} won't do
1010 what you might want, because it will be split at the space and the
1011 NASM command-line processing will get confused by the two
1012 nonsensical words \c{-dNAME="my} and \c{name"}.
1014 To get round this, NASM provides a feature whereby, if you begin the
1015 \c{NASMENV} environment variable with some character that isn't a minus
1016 sign, then NASM will treat this character as the \i{separator
1017 character} for options. So setting the \c{NASMENV} variable to the
1018 value \c{!-s!-ic:\\nasmlib\\} is equivalent to setting it to \c{-s
1019 -ic:\\nasmlib\\}, but \c{!-dNAME="my name"} will work.
1021 This environment variable was previously called \c{NASM}. This was
1022 changed with version 0.98.31.
1025 \H{qstart} \i{Quick Start} for \i{MASM} Users
1027 If you're used to writing programs with MASM, or with \i{TASM} in
1028 MASM-compatible (non-Ideal) mode, or with \i\c{a86}, this section
1029 attempts to outline the major differences between MASM's syntax and
1030 NASM's. If you're not already used to MASM, it's probably worth
1031 skipping this section.
1034 \S{qscs} NASM Is \I{case sensitivity}Case-Sensitive
1036 One simple difference is that NASM is case-sensitive. It makes a
1037 difference whether you call your label \c{foo}, \c{Foo} or \c{FOO}.
1038 If you're assembling to \c{DOS} or \c{OS/2} \c{.OBJ} files, you can
1039 invoke the \i\c{UPPERCASE} directive (documented in \k{objfmt}) to
1040 ensure that all symbols exported to other code modules are forced
1041 to be upper case; but even then, \e{within} a single module, NASM
1042 will distinguish between labels differing only in case.
1045 \S{qsbrackets} NASM Requires \i{Square Brackets} For \i{Memory References}
1047 NASM was designed with simplicity of syntax in mind. One of the
1048 \i{design goals} of NASM is that it should be possible, as far as is
1049 practical, for the user to look at a single line of NASM code
1050 and tell what opcode is generated by it. You can't do this in MASM:
1051 if you declare, for example,
1056 then the two lines of code
1061 generate completely different opcodes, despite having
1062 identical-looking syntaxes.
1064 NASM avoids this undesirable situation by having a much simpler
1065 syntax for memory references. The rule is simply that any access to
1066 the \e{contents} of a memory location requires square brackets
1067 around the address, and any access to the \e{address} of a variable
1068 doesn't. So an instruction of the form \c{mov ax,foo} will
1069 \e{always} refer to a compile-time constant, whether it's an \c{EQU}
1070 or the address of a variable; and to access the \e{contents} of the
1071 variable \c{bar}, you must code \c{mov ax,[bar]}.
1073 This also means that NASM has no need for MASM's \i\c{OFFSET}
1074 keyword, since the MASM code \c{mov ax,offset bar} means exactly the
1075 same thing as NASM's \c{mov ax,bar}. If you're trying to get
1076 large amounts of MASM code to assemble sensibly under NASM, you
1077 can always code \c{%idefine offset} to make the preprocessor treat
1078 the \c{OFFSET} keyword as a no-op.
1080 This issue is even more confusing in \i\c{a86}, where declaring a
1081 label with a trailing colon defines it to be a `label' as opposed to
1082 a `variable' and causes \c{a86} to adopt NASM-style semantics; so in
1083 \c{a86}, \c{mov ax,var} has different behaviour depending on whether
1084 \c{var} was declared as \c{var: dw 0} (a label) or \c{var dw 0} (a
1085 word-size variable). NASM is very simple by comparison:
1086 \e{everything} is a label.
1088 NASM, in the interests of simplicity, also does not support the
1089 \i{hybrid syntaxes} supported by MASM and its clones, such as
1090 \c{mov ax,table[bx]}, where a memory reference is denoted by one
1091 portion outside square brackets and another portion inside. The
1092 correct syntax for the above is \c{mov ax,[table+bx]}. Likewise,
1093 \c{mov ax,es:[di]} is wrong and \c{mov ax,[es:di]} is right.
1096 \S{qstypes} NASM Doesn't Store \i{Variable Types}
1098 NASM, by design, chooses not to remember the types of variables you
1099 declare. Whereas MASM will remember, on seeing \c{var dw 0}, that
1100 you declared \c{var} as a word-size variable, and will then be able
1101 to fill in the \i{ambiguity} in the size of the instruction \c{mov
1102 var,2}, NASM will deliberately remember nothing about the symbol
1103 \c{var} except where it begins, and so you must explicitly code
1104 \c{mov word [var],2}.
1106 For this reason, NASM doesn't support the \c{LODS}, \c{MOVS},
1107 \c{STOS}, \c{SCAS}, \c{CMPS}, \c{INS}, or \c{OUTS} instructions,
1108 but only supports the forms such as \c{LODSB}, \c{MOVSW}, and
1109 \c{SCASD}, which explicitly specify the size of the components of
1110 the strings being manipulated.
1113 \S{qsassume} NASM Doesn't \i\c{ASSUME}
1115 As part of NASM's drive for simplicity, it also does not support the
1116 \c{ASSUME} directive. NASM will not keep track of what values you
1117 choose to put in your segment registers, and will never
1118 \e{automatically} generate a \i{segment override} prefix.
1121 \S{qsmodel} NASM Doesn't Support \i{Memory Models}
1123 NASM also does not have any directives to support different 16-bit
1124 memory models. The programmer has to keep track of which functions
1125 are supposed to be called with a \i{far call} and which with a
1126 \i{near call}, and is responsible for putting the correct form of
1127 \c{RET} instruction (\c{RETN} or \c{RETF}; NASM accepts \c{RET}
1128 itself as an alternate form for \c{RETN}); in addition, the
1129 programmer is responsible for coding CALL FAR instructions where
1130 necessary when calling \e{external} functions, and must also keep
1131 track of which external variable definitions are far and which are
1135 \S{qsfpu} \i{Floating-Point} Differences
1137 NASM uses different names to refer to floating-point registers from
1138 MASM: where MASM would call them \c{ST(0)}, \c{ST(1)} and so on, and
1139 \i\c{a86} would call them simply \c{0}, \c{1} and so on, NASM
1140 chooses to call them \c{st0}, \c{st1} etc.
1142 As of version 0.96, NASM now treats the instructions with
1143 \i{`nowait'} forms in the same way as MASM-compatible assemblers.
1144 The idiosyncratic treatment employed by 0.95 and earlier was based
1145 on a misunderstanding by the authors.
1148 \S{qsother} Other Differences
1150 For historical reasons, NASM uses the keyword \i\c{TWORD} where MASM
1151 and compatible assemblers use \i\c{TBYTE}.
1153 NASM does not declare \i{uninitialized storage} in the same way as
1154 MASM: where a MASM programmer might use \c{stack db 64 dup (?)},
1155 NASM requires \c{stack resb 64}, intended to be read as `reserve 64
1156 bytes'. For a limited amount of compatibility, since NASM treats
1157 \c{?} as a valid character in symbol names, you can code \c{? equ 0}
1158 and then writing \c{dw ?} will at least do something vaguely useful.
1159 \I\c{RESB}\i\c{DUP} is still not a supported syntax, however.
1161 In addition to all of this, macros and directives work completely
1162 differently to MASM. See \k{preproc} and \k{directive} for further
1166 \C{lang} The NASM Language
1168 \H{syntax} Layout of a NASM Source Line
1170 Like most assemblers, each NASM source line contains (unless it
1171 is a macro, a preprocessor directive or an assembler directive: see
1172 \k{preproc} and \k{directive}) some combination of the four fields
1174 \c label: instruction operands ; comment
1176 As usual, most of these fields are optional; the presence or absence
1177 of any combination of a label, an instruction and a comment is allowed.
1178 Of course, the operand field is either required or forbidden by the
1179 presence and nature of the instruction field.
1181 NASM uses backslash (\\) as the line continuation character; if a line
1182 ends with backslash, the next line is considered to be a part of the
1183 backslash-ended line.
1185 NASM places no restrictions on white space within a line: labels may
1186 have white space before them, or instructions may have no space
1187 before them, or anything. The \i{colon} after a label is also
1188 optional. (Note that this means that if you intend to code \c{lodsb}
1189 alone on a line, and type \c{lodab} by accident, then that's still a
1190 valid source line which does nothing but define a label. Running
1191 NASM with the command-line option
1192 \I{orphan-labels}\c{-w+orphan-labels} will cause it to warn you if
1193 you define a label alone on a line without a \i{trailing colon}.)
1195 \i{Valid characters} in labels are letters, numbers, \c{_}, \c{$},
1196 \c{#}, \c{@}, \c{~}, \c{.}, and \c{?}. The only characters which may
1197 be used as the \e{first} character of an identifier are letters,
1198 \c{.} (with special meaning: see \k{locallab}), \c{_} and \c{?}.
1199 An identifier may also be prefixed with a \I{$, prefix}\c{$} to
1200 indicate that it is intended to be read as an identifier and not a
1201 reserved word; thus, if some other module you are linking with
1202 defines a symbol called \c{eax}, you can refer to \c{$eax} in NASM
1203 code to distinguish the symbol from the register. Maximum length of
1204 an identifier is 4095 characters.
1206 The instruction field may contain any machine instruction: Pentium
1207 and P6 instructions, FPU instructions, MMX instructions and even
1208 undocumented instructions are all supported. The instruction may be
1209 prefixed by \c{LOCK}, \c{REP}, \c{REPE}/\c{REPZ} or
1210 \c{REPNE}/\c{REPNZ}, in the usual way. Explicit \I{address-size
1211 prefixes}address-size and \i{operand-size prefixes} \i\c{A16},
1212 \i\c{A32}, \i\c{A64}, \i\c{O16} and \i\c{O32}, \i\c{O64} are provided - one example of their use
1213 is given in \k{mixsize}. You can also use the name of a \I{segment
1214 override}segment register as an instruction prefix: coding
1215 \c{es mov [bx],ax} is equivalent to coding \c{mov [es:bx],ax}. We
1216 recommend the latter syntax, since it is consistent with other
1217 syntactic features of the language, but for instructions such as
1218 \c{LODSB}, which has no operands and yet can require a segment
1219 override, there is no clean syntactic way to proceed apart from
1222 An instruction is not required to use a prefix: prefixes such as
1223 \c{CS}, \c{A32}, \c{LOCK} or \c{REPE} can appear on a line by
1224 themselves, and NASM will just generate the prefix bytes.
1226 In addition to actual machine instructions, NASM also supports a
1227 number of pseudo-instructions, described in \k{pseudop}.
1229 Instruction \i{operands} may take a number of forms: they can be
1230 registers, described simply by the register name (e.g. \c{ax},
1231 \c{bp}, \c{ebx}, \c{cr0}: NASM does not use the \c{gas}-style
1232 syntax in which register names must be prefixed by a \c{%} sign), or
1233 they can be \i{effective addresses} (see \k{effaddr}), constants
1234 (\k{const}) or expressions (\k{expr}).
1236 For x87 \i{floating-point} instructions, NASM accepts a wide range of
1237 syntaxes: you can use two-operand forms like MASM supports, or you
1238 can use NASM's native single-operand forms in most cases.
1240 \# all forms of each supported instruction are given in
1242 For example, you can code:
1244 \c fadd st1 ; this sets st0 := st0 + st1
1245 \c fadd st0,st1 ; so does this
1247 \c fadd st1,st0 ; this sets st1 := st1 + st0
1248 \c fadd to st1 ; so does this
1250 Almost any x87 floating-point instruction that references memory must
1251 use one of the prefixes \i\c{DWORD}, \i\c{QWORD} or \i\c{TWORD} to
1252 indicate what size of \i{memory operand} it refers to.
1255 \H{pseudop} \i{Pseudo-Instructions}
1257 Pseudo-instructions are things which, though not real x86 machine
1258 instructions, are used in the instruction field anyway because that's
1259 the most convenient place to put them. The current pseudo-instructions
1260 are \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, \i\c{DO} and
1261 \i\c{DY}; their \i{uninitialized} counterparts \i\c{RESB}, \i\c{RESW},
1262 \i\c{RESD}, \i\c{RESQ}, \i\c{REST}, \i\c{RESO} and \i\c{RESY}; the
1263 \i\c{INCBIN} command, the \i\c{EQU} command, and the \i\c{TIMES}
1267 \S{db} \c{DB} and Friends: Declaring Initialized Data
1269 \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, \i\c{DO} and
1270 \i\c{DY} are used, much as in MASM, to declare initialized data in the
1271 output file. They can be invoked in a wide range of ways:
1272 \I{floating-point}\I{character constant}\I{string constant}
1274 \c db 0x55 ; just the byte 0x55
1275 \c db 0x55,0x56,0x57 ; three bytes in succession
1276 \c db 'a',0x55 ; character constants are OK
1277 \c db 'hello',13,10,'$' ; so are string constants
1278 \c dw 0x1234 ; 0x34 0x12
1279 \c dw 'a' ; 0x61 0x00 (it's just a number)
1280 \c dw 'ab' ; 0x61 0x62 (character constant)
1281 \c dw 'abc' ; 0x61 0x62 0x63 0x00 (string)
1282 \c dd 0x12345678 ; 0x78 0x56 0x34 0x12
1283 \c dd 1.234567e20 ; floating-point constant
1284 \c dq 0x123456789abcdef0 ; eight byte constant
1285 \c dq 1.234567e20 ; double-precision float
1286 \c dt 1.234567e20 ; extended-precision float
1288 \c{DT}, \c{DO} and \c{DY} do not accept \i{numeric constants} as operands.
1291 \S{resb} \c{RESB} and Friends: Declaring \i{Uninitialized} Data
1293 \i\c{RESB}, \i\c{RESW}, \i\c{RESD}, \i\c{RESQ}, \i\c{REST}, \i\c{RESO}
1294 and \i\c{RESY} are designed to be used in the BSS section of a module:
1295 they declare \e{uninitialized} storage space. Each takes a single
1296 operand, which is the number of bytes, words, doublewords or whatever
1297 to reserve. As stated in \k{qsother}, NASM does not support the
1298 MASM/TASM syntax of reserving uninitialized space by writing
1299 \I\c{?}\c{DW ?} or similar things: this is what it does instead. The
1300 operand to a \c{RESB}-type pseudo-instruction is a \i\e{critical
1301 expression}: see \k{crit}.
1305 \c buffer: resb 64 ; reserve 64 bytes
1306 \c wordvar: resw 1 ; reserve a word
1307 \c realarray resq 10 ; array of ten reals
1308 \c ymmval: resy 1 ; one YMM register
1310 \S{incbin} \i\c{INCBIN}: Including External \i{Binary Files}
1312 \c{INCBIN} is borrowed from the old Amiga assembler \i{DevPac}: it
1313 includes a binary file verbatim into the output file. This can be
1314 handy for (for example) including \i{graphics} and \i{sound} data
1315 directly into a game executable file. It can be called in one of
1318 \c incbin "file.dat" ; include the whole file
1319 \c incbin "file.dat",1024 ; skip the first 1024 bytes
1320 \c incbin "file.dat",1024,512 ; skip the first 1024, and
1321 \c ; actually include at most 512
1323 \c{INCBIN} is both a directive and a standard macro; the standard
1324 macro version searches for the file in the include file search path
1325 and adds the file to the dependency lists. This macro can be
1326 overridden if desired.
1329 \S{equ} \i\c{EQU}: Defining Constants
1331 \c{EQU} defines a symbol to a given constant value: when \c{EQU} is
1332 used, the source line must contain a label. The action of \c{EQU} is
1333 to define the given label name to the value of its (only) operand.
1334 This definition is absolute, and cannot change later. So, for
1337 \c message db 'hello, world'
1338 \c msglen equ $-message
1340 defines \c{msglen} to be the constant 12. \c{msglen} may not then be
1341 redefined later. This is not a \i{preprocessor} definition either:
1342 the value of \c{msglen} is evaluated \e{once}, using the value of
1343 \c{$} (see \k{expr} for an explanation of \c{$}) at the point of
1344 definition, rather than being evaluated wherever it is referenced
1345 and using the value of \c{$} at the point of reference.
1348 \S{times} \i\c{TIMES}: \i{Repeating} Instructions or Data
1350 The \c{TIMES} prefix causes the instruction to be assembled multiple
1351 times. This is partly present as NASM's equivalent of the \i\c{DUP}
1352 syntax supported by \i{MASM}-compatible assemblers, in that you can
1355 \c zerobuf: times 64 db 0
1357 or similar things; but \c{TIMES} is more versatile than that. The
1358 argument to \c{TIMES} is not just a numeric constant, but a numeric
1359 \e{expression}, so you can do things like
1361 \c buffer: db 'hello, world'
1362 \c times 64-$+buffer db ' '
1364 which will store exactly enough spaces to make the total length of
1365 \c{buffer} up to 64. Finally, \c{TIMES} can be applied to ordinary
1366 instructions, so you can code trivial \i{unrolled loops} in it:
1370 Note that there is no effective difference between \c{times 100 resb
1371 1} and \c{resb 100}, except that the latter will be assembled about
1372 100 times faster due to the internal structure of the assembler.
1374 The operand to \c{TIMES} is a critical expression (\k{crit}).
1376 Note also that \c{TIMES} can't be applied to \i{macros}: the reason
1377 for this is that \c{TIMES} is processed after the macro phase, which
1378 allows the argument to \c{TIMES} to contain expressions such as
1379 \c{64-$+buffer} as above. To repeat more than one line of code, or a
1380 complex macro, use the preprocessor \i\c{%rep} directive.
1383 \H{effaddr} Effective Addresses
1385 An \i{effective address} is any operand to an instruction which
1386 \I{memory reference}references memory. Effective addresses, in NASM,
1387 have a very simple syntax: they consist of an expression evaluating
1388 to the desired address, enclosed in \i{square brackets}. For
1393 \c mov ax,[wordvar+1]
1394 \c mov ax,[es:wordvar+bx]
1396 Anything not conforming to this simple system is not a valid memory
1397 reference in NASM, for example \c{es:wordvar[bx]}.
1399 More complicated effective addresses, such as those involving more
1400 than one register, work in exactly the same way:
1402 \c mov eax,[ebx*2+ecx+offset]
1405 NASM is capable of doing \i{algebra} on these effective addresses,
1406 so that things which don't necessarily \e{look} legal are perfectly
1409 \c mov eax,[ebx*5] ; assembles as [ebx*4+ebx]
1410 \c mov eax,[label1*2-label2] ; ie [label1+(label1-label2)]
1412 Some forms of effective address have more than one assembled form;
1413 in most such cases NASM will generate the smallest form it can. For
1414 example, there are distinct assembled forms for the 32-bit effective
1415 addresses \c{[eax*2+0]} and \c{[eax+eax]}, and NASM will generally
1416 generate the latter on the grounds that the former requires four
1417 bytes to store a zero offset.
1419 NASM has a hinting mechanism which will cause \c{[eax+ebx]} and
1420 \c{[ebx+eax]} to generate different opcodes; this is occasionally
1421 useful because \c{[esi+ebp]} and \c{[ebp+esi]} have different
1422 default segment registers.
1424 However, you can force NASM to generate an effective address in a
1425 particular form by the use of the keywords \c{BYTE}, \c{WORD},
1426 \c{DWORD} and \c{NOSPLIT}. If you need \c{[eax+3]} to be assembled
1427 using a double-word offset field instead of the one byte NASM will
1428 normally generate, you can code \c{[dword eax+3]}. Similarly, you
1429 can force NASM to use a byte offset for a small value which it
1430 hasn't seen on the first pass (see \k{crit} for an example of such a
1431 code fragment) by using \c{[byte eax+offset]}. As special cases,
1432 \c{[byte eax]} will code \c{[eax+0]} with a byte offset of zero, and
1433 \c{[dword eax]} will code it with a double-word offset of zero. The
1434 normal form, \c{[eax]}, will be coded with no offset field.
1436 The form described in the previous paragraph is also useful if you
1437 are trying to access data in a 32-bit segment from within 16 bit code.
1438 For more information on this see the section on mixed-size addressing
1439 (\k{mixaddr}). In particular, if you need to access data with a known
1440 offset that is larger than will fit in a 16-bit value, if you don't
1441 specify that it is a dword offset, nasm will cause the high word of
1442 the offset to be lost.
1444 Similarly, NASM will split \c{[eax*2]} into \c{[eax+eax]} because
1445 that allows the offset field to be absent and space to be saved; in
1446 fact, it will also split \c{[eax*2+offset]} into
1447 \c{[eax+eax+offset]}. You can combat this behaviour by the use of
1448 the \c{NOSPLIT} keyword: \c{[nosplit eax*2]} will force
1449 \c{[eax*2+0]} to be generated literally.
1451 In 64-bit mode, NASM will by default generate absolute addresses. The
1452 \i\c{REL} keyword makes it produce \c{RIP}-relative addresses. Since
1453 this is frequently the normally desired behaviour, see the \c{DEFAULT}
1454 directive (\k{default}). The keyword \i\c{ABS} overrides \i\c{REL}.
1457 \H{const} \i{Constants}
1459 NASM understands four different types of constant: numeric,
1460 character, string and floating-point.
1463 \S{numconst} \i{Numeric Constants}
1465 A numeric constant is simply a number. NASM allows you to specify
1466 numbers in a variety of number bases, in a variety of ways: you can
1467 suffix \c{H} or \c{X}, \c{D} or \c{T}, \c{Q} or \c{O}, and \c{B} or
1468 \c{Y} for \i{hexadecimal}, \i{decimal}, \i{octal} and \i{binary}
1469 respectively, or you can prefix \c{0x}, for hexadecimal in the style
1470 of C, or you can prefix \c{$} for hexadecimal in the style of Borland
1471 Pascal or Motorola Assemblers. Note, though, that the \I{$,
1472 prefix}\c{$} prefix does double duty as a prefix on identifiers (see
1473 \k{syntax}), so a hex number prefixed with a \c{$} sign must have a
1474 digit after the \c{$} rather than a letter. In addition, current
1475 versions of NASM accept the prefix \c{0h} for hexadecimal, \c{0d} or
1476 \c{0t} for decimal, \c{0o} or \c{0q} for octal, and \c{0b} or \c{0y}
1477 for binary. Please note that unlike C, a \c{0} prefix by itself does
1478 \e{not} imply an octal constant!
1480 Numeric constants can have underscores (\c{_}) interspersed to break
1483 Some examples (all producing exactly the same code):
1485 \c mov ax,200 ; decimal
1486 \c mov ax,0200 ; still decimal
1487 \c mov ax,0200d ; explicitly decimal
1488 \c mov ax,0d200 ; also decimal
1489 \c mov ax,0c8h ; hex
1490 \c mov ax,$0c8 ; hex again: the 0 is required
1491 \c mov ax,0xc8 ; hex yet again
1492 \c mov ax,0hc8 ; still hex
1493 \c mov ax,310q ; octal
1494 \c mov ax,310o ; octal again
1495 \c mov ax,0o310 ; octal yet again
1496 \c mov ax,0q310 ; hex yet again
1497 \c mov ax,11001000b ; binary
1498 \c mov ax,1100_1000b ; same binary constant
1499 \c mov ax,1100_1000y ; same binary constant once more
1500 \c mov ax,0b1100_1000 ; same binary constant yet again
1501 \c mov ax,0y1100_1000 ; same binary constant yet again
1503 \S{strings} \I{Strings}\i{Character Strings}
1505 A character string consists of up to eight characters enclosed in
1506 either single quotes (\c{'...'}), double quotes (\c{"..."}) or
1507 backquotes (\c{`...`}). Single or double quotes are equivalent to
1508 NASM (except of course that surrounding the constant with single
1509 quotes allows double quotes to appear within it and vice versa); the
1510 contents of those are represented verbatim. Strings enclosed in
1511 backquotes support C-style \c{\\}-escapes for special characters.
1514 The following \i{escape sequences} are recognized by backquoted strings:
1516 \c \' single quote (')
1517 \c \" double quote (")
1519 \c \\\ backslash (\)
1520 \c \? question mark (?)
1528 \c \e ESC (ASCII 27)
1529 \c \377 Up to 3 octal digits - literal byte
1530 \c \xFF Up to 2 hexadecimal digits - literal byte
1531 \c \u1234 4 hexadecimal digits - Unicode character
1532 \c \U12345678 8 hexadecimal digits - Unicode character
1534 All other escape sequences are reserved. Note that \c{\\0}, meaning a
1535 \c{NUL} character (ASCII 0), is a special case of the octal escape
1538 \i{Unicode} characters specified with \c{\\u} or \c{\\U} are converted to
1539 \i{UTF-8}. For example, the following lines are all equivalent:
1541 \c db `\u263a` ; UTF-8 smiley face
1542 \c db `\xe2\x98\xba` ; UTF-8 smiley face
1543 \c db 0E2h, 098h, 0BAh ; UTF-8 smiley face
1546 \S{chrconst} \i{Character Constants}
1548 A character constant consists of a string up to eight bytes long, used
1549 in an expression context. It is treated as if it was an integer.
1551 A character constant with more than one byte will be arranged
1552 with \i{little-endian} order in mind: if you code
1556 then the constant generated is not \c{0x61626364}, but
1557 \c{0x64636261}, so that if you were then to store the value into
1558 memory, it would read \c{abcd} rather than \c{dcba}. This is also
1559 the sense of character constants understood by the Pentium's
1560 \i\c{CPUID} instruction.
1563 \S{strconst} \i{String Constants}
1565 String constants are character strings used in the context of some
1566 pseudo-instructions, namely the
1567 \I\c{DW}\I\c{DD}\I\c{DQ}\I\c{DT}\I\c{DO}\I\c{DY}\i\c{DB} family and
1568 \i\c{INCBIN} (where it represents a filename.) They are also used in
1569 certain preprocessor directives.
1571 A string constant looks like a character constant, only longer. It
1572 is treated as a concatenation of maximum-size character constants
1573 for the conditions. So the following are equivalent:
1575 \c db 'hello' ; string constant
1576 \c db 'h','e','l','l','o' ; equivalent character constants
1578 And the following are also equivalent:
1580 \c dd 'ninechars' ; doubleword string constant
1581 \c dd 'nine','char','s' ; becomes three doublewords
1582 \c db 'ninechars',0,0,0 ; and really looks like this
1584 Note that when used in a string-supporting context, quoted strings are
1585 treated as a string constants even if they are short enough to be a
1586 character constant, because otherwise \c{db 'ab'} would have the same
1587 effect as \c{db 'a'}, which would be silly. Similarly, three-character
1588 or four-character constants are treated as strings when they are
1589 operands to \c{DW}, and so forth.
1591 \S{unicode} \I{UTF-16}\I{UTF-32}\i{Unicode} Strings
1593 The special operators \i\c{__utf16__} and \i\c{__utf32__} allows
1594 definition of Unicode strings. They take a string in UTF-8 format and
1595 converts it to (littleendian) UTF-16 or UTF-32, respectively.
1599 \c %define u(x) __utf16__(x)
1600 \c %define w(x) __utf32__(x)
1602 \c dw u('C:\WINDOWS'), 0 ; Pathname in UTF-16
1603 \c dd w(`A + B = \u206a`), 0 ; String in UTF-32
1605 \c{__utf16__} and \c{__utf32__} can be applied either to strings
1606 passed to the \c{DB} family instructions, or to character constants in
1607 an expression context.
1609 \S{fltconst} \I{floating-point, constants}Floating-Point Constants
1611 \i{Floating-point} constants are acceptable only as arguments to
1612 \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, and \i\c{DO}, or as
1613 arguments to the special operators \i\c{__float8__},
1614 \i\c{__float16__}, \i\c{__float32__}, \i\c{__float64__},
1615 \i\c{__float80m__}, \i\c{__float80e__}, \i\c{__float128l__}, and
1616 \i\c{__float128h__}.
1618 Floating-point constants are expressed in the traditional form:
1619 digits, then a period, then optionally more digits, then optionally an
1620 \c{E} followed by an exponent. The period is mandatory, so that NASM
1621 can distinguish between \c{dd 1}, which declares an integer constant,
1622 and \c{dd 1.0} which declares a floating-point constant.
1624 NASM also support C99-style hexadecimal floating-point: \c{0x},
1625 hexadecimal digits, period, optionally more hexadeximal digits, then
1626 optionally a \c{P} followed by a \e{binary} (not hexadecimal) exponent
1627 in decimal notation. As an extension, NASM additionally supports the
1628 \c{0h} and \c{$} prefixes for hexadecimal, as well binary and octal
1629 floating-point, using the \c{0b} or \c{0y} and \c{0o} or \c{0q}
1630 prefixes, respectively.
1632 Underscores to break up groups of digits are permitted in
1633 floating-point constants as well.
1637 \c db -0.2 ; "Quarter precision"
1638 \c dw -0.5 ; IEEE 754r/SSE5 half precision
1639 \c dd 1.2 ; an easy one
1640 \c dd 1.222_222_222 ; underscores are permitted
1641 \c dd 0x1p+2 ; 1.0x2^2 = 4.0
1642 \c dq 0x1p+32 ; 1.0x2^32 = 4 294 967 296.0
1643 \c dq 1.e10 ; 10 000 000 000.0
1644 \c dq 1.e+10 ; synonymous with 1.e10
1645 \c dq 1.e-10 ; 0.000 000 000 1
1646 \c dt 3.141592653589793238462 ; pi
1647 \c do 1.e+4000 ; IEEE 754r quad precision
1649 The 8-bit "quarter-precision" floating-point format is
1650 sign:exponent:mantissa = 1:4:3 with an exponent bias of 7. This
1651 appears to be the most frequently used 8-bit floating-point format,
1652 although it is not covered by any formal standard. This is sometimes
1653 called a "\i{minifloat}."
1655 The special operators are used to produce floating-point numbers in
1656 other contexts. They produce the binary representation of a specific
1657 floating-point number as an integer, and can use anywhere integer
1658 constants are used in an expression. \c{__float80m__} and
1659 \c{__float80e__} produce the 64-bit mantissa and 16-bit exponent of an
1660 80-bit floating-point number, and \c{__float128l__} and
1661 \c{__float128h__} produce the lower and upper 64-bit halves of a 128-bit
1662 floating-point number, respectively.
1666 \c mov rax,__float64__(3.141592653589793238462)
1668 ... would assign the binary representation of pi as a 64-bit floating
1669 point number into \c{RAX}. This is exactly equivalent to:
1671 \c mov rax,0x400921fb54442d18
1673 NASM cannot do compile-time arithmetic on floating-point constants.
1674 This is because NASM is designed to be portable - although it always
1675 generates code to run on x86 processors, the assembler itself can
1676 run on any system with an ANSI C compiler. Therefore, the assembler
1677 cannot guarantee the presence of a floating-point unit capable of
1678 handling the \i{Intel number formats}, and so for NASM to be able to
1679 do floating arithmetic it would have to include its own complete set
1680 of floating-point routines, which would significantly increase the
1681 size of the assembler for very little benefit.
1683 The special tokens \i\c{__Infinity__}, \i\c{__QNaN__} (or
1684 \i\c{__NaN__}) and \i\c{__SNaN__} can be used to generate
1685 \I{infinity}infinities, quiet \i{NaN}s, and signalling NaNs,
1686 respectively. These are normally used as macros:
1688 \c %define Inf __Infinity__
1689 \c %define NaN __QNaN__
1691 \c dq +1.5, -Inf, NaN ; Double-precision constants
1693 \S{bcdconst} \I{floating-point, packed BCD constants}Packed BCD Constants
1695 x87-style packed BCD constants can be used in the same contexts as
1696 80-bit floating-point numbers. They are suffixed with \c{p} or
1697 prefixed with \c{0p}, and can include up to 18 decimal digits.
1699 As with other numeric constants, underscores can be used to separate
1704 \c dt 12_345_678_901_245_678p
1705 \c dt -12_345_678_901_245_678p
1710 \H{expr} \i{Expressions}
1712 Expressions in NASM are similar in syntax to those in C. Expressions
1713 are evaluated as 64-bit integers which are then adjusted to the
1716 NASM supports two special tokens in expressions, allowing
1717 calculations to involve the current assembly position: the
1718 \I{$, here}\c{$} and \i\c{$$} tokens. \c{$} evaluates to the assembly
1719 position at the beginning of the line containing the expression; so
1720 you can code an \i{infinite loop} using \c{JMP $}. \c{$$} evaluates
1721 to the beginning of the current section; so you can tell how far
1722 into the section you are by using \c{($-$$)}.
1724 The arithmetic \i{operators} provided by NASM are listed here, in
1725 increasing order of \i{precedence}.
1728 \S{expor} \i\c{|}: \i{Bitwise OR} Operator
1730 The \c{|} operator gives a bitwise OR, exactly as performed by the
1731 \c{OR} machine instruction. Bitwise OR is the lowest-priority
1732 arithmetic operator supported by NASM.
1735 \S{expxor} \i\c{^}: \i{Bitwise XOR} Operator
1737 \c{^} provides the bitwise XOR operation.
1740 \S{expand} \i\c{&}: \i{Bitwise AND} Operator
1742 \c{&} provides the bitwise AND operation.
1745 \S{expshift} \i\c{<<} and \i\c{>>}: \i{Bit Shift} Operators
1747 \c{<<} gives a bit-shift to the left, just as it does in C. So \c{5<<3}
1748 evaluates to 5 times 8, or 40. \c{>>} gives a bit-shift to the
1749 right; in NASM, such a shift is \e{always} unsigned, so that
1750 the bits shifted in from the left-hand end are filled with zero
1751 rather than a sign-extension of the previous highest bit.
1754 \S{expplmi} \I{+ opaddition}\c{+} and \I{- opsubtraction}\c{-}:
1755 \i{Addition} and \i{Subtraction} Operators
1757 The \c{+} and \c{-} operators do perfectly ordinary addition and
1761 \S{expmul} \i\c{*}, \i\c{/}, \i\c{//}, \i\c{%} and \i\c{%%}:
1762 \i{Multiplication} and \i{Division}
1764 \c{*} is the multiplication operator. \c{/} and \c{//} are both
1765 division operators: \c{/} is \i{unsigned division} and \c{//} is
1766 \i{signed division}. Similarly, \c{%} and \c{%%} provide \I{unsigned
1767 modulo}\I{modulo operators}unsigned and
1768 \i{signed modulo} operators respectively.
1770 NASM, like ANSI C, provides no guarantees about the sensible
1771 operation of the signed modulo operator.
1773 Since the \c{%} character is used extensively by the macro
1774 \i{preprocessor}, you should ensure that both the signed and unsigned
1775 modulo operators are followed by white space wherever they appear.
1778 \S{expmul} \i{Unary Operators}: \I{+ opunary}\c{+}, \I{- opunary}\c{-},
1779 \i\c{~}, \I{! opunary}\c{!} and \i\c{SEG}
1781 The highest-priority operators in NASM's expression grammar are
1782 those which only apply to one argument. \c{-} negates its operand,
1783 \c{+} does nothing (it's provided for symmetry with \c{-}), \c{~}
1784 computes the \i{one's complement} of its operand, \c{!} is the
1785 \i{logical negation} operator, and \c{SEG} provides the \i{segment address}
1786 of its operand (explained in more detail in \k{segwrt}).
1789 \H{segwrt} \i\c{SEG} and \i\c{WRT}
1791 When writing large 16-bit programs, which must be split into
1792 multiple \i{segments}, it is often necessary to be able to refer to
1793 the \I{segment address}segment part of the address of a symbol. NASM
1794 supports the \c{SEG} operator to perform this function.
1796 The \c{SEG} operator returns the \i\e{preferred} segment base of a
1797 symbol, defined as the segment base relative to which the offset of
1798 the symbol makes sense. So the code
1800 \c mov ax,seg symbol
1804 will load \c{ES:BX} with a valid pointer to the symbol \c{symbol}.
1806 Things can be more complex than this: since 16-bit segments and
1807 \i{groups} may \I{overlapping segments}overlap, you might occasionally
1808 want to refer to some symbol using a different segment base from the
1809 preferred one. NASM lets you do this, by the use of the \c{WRT}
1810 (With Reference To) keyword. So you can do things like
1812 \c mov ax,weird_seg ; weird_seg is a segment base
1814 \c mov bx,symbol wrt weird_seg
1816 to load \c{ES:BX} with a different, but functionally equivalent,
1817 pointer to the symbol \c{symbol}.
1819 NASM supports far (inter-segment) calls and jumps by means of the
1820 syntax \c{call segment:offset}, where \c{segment} and \c{offset}
1821 both represent immediate values. So to call a far procedure, you
1822 could code either of
1824 \c call (seg procedure):procedure
1825 \c call weird_seg:(procedure wrt weird_seg)
1827 (The parentheses are included for clarity, to show the intended
1828 parsing of the above instructions. They are not necessary in
1831 NASM supports the syntax \I\c{CALL FAR}\c{call far procedure} as a
1832 synonym for the first of the above usages. \c{JMP} works identically
1833 to \c{CALL} in these examples.
1835 To declare a \i{far pointer} to a data item in a data segment, you
1838 \c dw symbol, seg symbol
1840 NASM supports no convenient synonym for this, though you can always
1841 invent one using the macro processor.
1844 \H{strict} \i\c{STRICT}: Inhibiting Optimization
1846 When assembling with the optimizer set to level 2 or higher (see
1847 \k{opt-O}), NASM will use size specifiers (\c{BYTE}, \c{WORD},
1848 \c{DWORD}, \c{QWORD}, \c{TWORD}, \c{OWORD} or \c{YWORD}), but will
1849 give them the smallest possible size. The keyword \c{STRICT} can be
1850 used to inhibit optimization and force a particular operand to be
1851 emitted in the specified size. For example, with the optimizer on, and
1852 in \c{BITS 16} mode,
1856 is encoded in three bytes \c{66 6A 21}, whereas
1858 \c push strict dword 33
1860 is encoded in six bytes, with a full dword immediate operand \c{66 68
1863 With the optimizer off, the same code (six bytes) is generated whether
1864 the \c{STRICT} keyword was used or not.
1867 \H{crit} \i{Critical Expressions}
1869 Although NASM has an optional multi-pass optimizer, there are some
1870 expressions which must be resolvable on the first pass. These are
1871 called \e{Critical Expressions}.
1873 The first pass is used to determine the size of all the assembled
1874 code and data, so that the second pass, when generating all the
1875 code, knows all the symbol addresses the code refers to. So one
1876 thing NASM can't handle is code whose size depends on the value of a
1877 symbol declared after the code in question. For example,
1879 \c times (label-$) db 0
1880 \c label: db 'Where am I?'
1882 The argument to \i\c{TIMES} in this case could equally legally
1883 evaluate to anything at all; NASM will reject this example because
1884 it cannot tell the size of the \c{TIMES} line when it first sees it.
1885 It will just as firmly reject the slightly \I{paradox}paradoxical
1888 \c times (label-$+1) db 0
1889 \c label: db 'NOW where am I?'
1891 in which \e{any} value for the \c{TIMES} argument is by definition
1894 NASM rejects these examples by means of a concept called a
1895 \e{critical expression}, which is defined to be an expression whose
1896 value is required to be computable in the first pass, and which must
1897 therefore depend only on symbols defined before it. The argument to
1898 the \c{TIMES} prefix is a critical expression.
1900 \H{locallab} \i{Local Labels}
1902 NASM gives special treatment to symbols beginning with a \i{period}.
1903 A label beginning with a single period is treated as a \e{local}
1904 label, which means that it is associated with the previous non-local
1905 label. So, for example:
1907 \c label1 ; some code
1915 \c label2 ; some code
1923 In the above code fragment, each \c{JNE} instruction jumps to the
1924 line immediately before it, because the two definitions of \c{.loop}
1925 are kept separate by virtue of each being associated with the
1926 previous non-local label.
1928 This form of local label handling is borrowed from the old Amiga
1929 assembler \i{DevPac}; however, NASM goes one step further, in
1930 allowing access to local labels from other parts of the code. This
1931 is achieved by means of \e{defining} a local label in terms of the
1932 previous non-local label: the first definition of \c{.loop} above is
1933 really defining a symbol called \c{label1.loop}, and the second
1934 defines a symbol called \c{label2.loop}. So, if you really needed
1937 \c label3 ; some more code
1942 Sometimes it is useful - in a macro, for instance - to be able to
1943 define a label which can be referenced from anywhere but which
1944 doesn't interfere with the normal local-label mechanism. Such a
1945 label can't be non-local because it would interfere with subsequent
1946 definitions of, and references to, local labels; and it can't be
1947 local because the macro that defined it wouldn't know the label's
1948 full name. NASM therefore introduces a third type of label, which is
1949 probably only useful in macro definitions: if a label begins with
1950 the \I{label prefix}special prefix \i\c{..@}, then it does nothing
1951 to the local label mechanism. So you could code
1953 \c label1: ; a non-local label
1954 \c .local: ; this is really label1.local
1955 \c ..@foo: ; this is a special symbol
1956 \c label2: ; another non-local label
1957 \c .local: ; this is really label2.local
1959 \c jmp ..@foo ; this will jump three lines up
1961 NASM has the capacity to define other special symbols beginning with
1962 a double period: for example, \c{..start} is used to specify the
1963 entry point in the \c{obj} output format (see \k{dotdotstart}),
1964 \c{..imagebase} is used to find out the offset from a base address
1965 of the current image in the \c{win64} output format (see \k{win64pic}).
1966 So just keep in mind that symbols beginning with a double period are
1970 \C{preproc} The NASM \i{Preprocessor}
1972 NASM contains a powerful \i{macro processor}, which supports
1973 conditional assembly, multi-level file inclusion, two forms of macro
1974 (single-line and multi-line), and a `context stack' mechanism for
1975 extra macro power. Preprocessor directives all begin with a \c{%}
1978 The preprocessor collapses all lines which end with a backslash (\\)
1979 character into a single line. Thus:
1981 \c %define THIS_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME_IS_DEFINED_TO \\
1984 will work like a single-line macro without the backslash-newline
1987 \H{slmacro} \i{Single-Line Macros}
1989 \S{define} The Normal Way: \I\c{%idefine}\i\c{%define}
1991 Single-line macros are defined using the \c{%define} preprocessor
1992 directive. The definitions work in a similar way to C; so you can do
1995 \c %define ctrl 0x1F &
1996 \c %define param(a,b) ((a)+(a)*(b))
1998 \c mov byte [param(2,ebx)], ctrl 'D'
2000 which will expand to
2002 \c mov byte [(2)+(2)*(ebx)], 0x1F & 'D'
2004 When the expansion of a single-line macro contains tokens which
2005 invoke another macro, the expansion is performed at invocation time,
2006 not at definition time. Thus the code
2008 \c %define a(x) 1+b(x)
2013 will evaluate in the expected way to \c{mov ax,1+2*8}, even though
2014 the macro \c{b} wasn't defined at the time of definition of \c{a}.
2016 Macros defined with \c{%define} are \i{case sensitive}: after
2017 \c{%define foo bar}, only \c{foo} will expand to \c{bar}: \c{Foo} or
2018 \c{FOO} will not. By using \c{%idefine} instead of \c{%define} (the
2019 `i' stands for `insensitive') you can define all the case variants
2020 of a macro at once, so that \c{%idefine foo bar} would cause
2021 \c{foo}, \c{Foo}, \c{FOO}, \c{fOO} and so on all to expand to
2024 There is a mechanism which detects when a macro call has occurred as
2025 a result of a previous expansion of the same macro, to guard against
2026 \i{circular references} and infinite loops. If this happens, the
2027 preprocessor will only expand the first occurrence of the macro.
2030 \c %define a(x) 1+a(x)
2034 the macro \c{a(3)} will expand once, becoming \c{1+a(3)}, and will
2035 then expand no further. This behaviour can be useful: see \k{32c}
2036 for an example of its use.
2038 You can \I{overloading, single-line macros}overload single-line
2039 macros: if you write
2041 \c %define foo(x) 1+x
2042 \c %define foo(x,y) 1+x*y
2044 the preprocessor will be able to handle both types of macro call,
2045 by counting the parameters you pass; so \c{foo(3)} will become
2046 \c{1+3} whereas \c{foo(ebx,2)} will become \c{1+ebx*2}. However, if
2051 then no other definition of \c{foo} will be accepted: a macro with
2052 no parameters prohibits the definition of the same name as a macro
2053 \e{with} parameters, and vice versa.
2055 This doesn't prevent single-line macros being \e{redefined}: you can
2056 perfectly well define a macro with
2060 and then re-define it later in the same source file with
2064 Then everywhere the macro \c{foo} is invoked, it will be expanded
2065 according to the most recent definition. This is particularly useful
2066 when defining single-line macros with \c{%assign} (see \k{assign}).
2068 You can \i{pre-define} single-line macros using the `-d' option on
2069 the NASM command line: see \k{opt-d}.
2072 \S{xdefine} Resolving \c{%define}: \I\c{%ixdefine}\i\c{%xdefine}
2074 To have a reference to an embedded single-line macro resolved at the
2075 time that the embedding macro is \e{defined}, as opposed to when the
2076 embedding macro is \e{expanded}, you need a different mechanism to the
2077 one offered by \c{%define}. The solution is to use \c{%xdefine}, or
2078 it's \I{case sensitive}case-insensitive counterpart \c{%ixdefine}.
2080 Suppose you have the following code:
2083 \c %define isFalse isTrue
2092 In this case, \c{val1} is equal to 0, and \c{val2} is equal to 1.
2093 This is because, when a single-line macro is defined using
2094 \c{%define}, it is expanded only when it is called. As \c{isFalse}
2095 expands to \c{isTrue}, the expansion will be the current value of
2096 \c{isTrue}. The first time it is called that is 0, and the second
2099 If you wanted \c{isFalse} to expand to the value assigned to the
2100 embedded macro \c{isTrue} at the time that \c{isFalse} was defined,
2101 you need to change the above code to use \c{%xdefine}.
2103 \c %xdefine isTrue 1
2104 \c %xdefine isFalse isTrue
2105 \c %xdefine isTrue 0
2109 \c %xdefine isTrue 1
2113 Now, each time that \c{isFalse} is called, it expands to 1,
2114 as that is what the embedded macro \c{isTrue} expanded to at
2115 the time that \c{isFalse} was defined.
2118 \S{indmacro} \i{Macro Indirection}: \I\c{%[}\c{%[...]}
2120 The \c{%[...]} construct can be used to expand macros in contexts
2121 where macro expansion would otherwise not occur, including in the
2122 names other macros. For example, if you have a set of macros named
2123 \c{Foo16}, \c{Foo32} and \c{Foo64}, you could write:
2125 \c mov ax,Foo%[__BITS__] ; The Foo value
2127 to use the builtin macro \c{__BITS__} (see \k{bitsm}) to automatically
2128 select between them. Similarly, the two statements:
2130 \c %xdefine Bar Quux ; Expands due to %xdefine
2131 \c %define Bar %[Quux] ; Expands due to %[...]
2133 have, in fact, exactly the same effect.
2135 \c{%[...]} concatenates to adjacent tokens in the same way that
2136 multi-line macro parameters do, see \k{concat} for details.
2139 \S{concat%+} Concatenating Single Line Macro Tokens: \i\c{%+}
2141 Individual tokens in single line macros can be concatenated, to produce
2142 longer tokens for later processing. This can be useful if there are
2143 several similar macros that perform similar functions.
2145 Please note that a space is required after \c{%+}, in order to
2146 disambiguate it from the syntax \c{%+1} used in multiline macros.
2148 As an example, consider the following:
2150 \c %define BDASTART 400h ; Start of BIOS data area
2152 \c struc tBIOSDA ; its structure
2158 Now, if we need to access the elements of tBIOSDA in different places,
2161 \c mov ax,BDASTART + tBIOSDA.COM1addr
2162 \c mov bx,BDASTART + tBIOSDA.COM2addr
2164 This will become pretty ugly (and tedious) if used in many places, and
2165 can be reduced in size significantly by using the following macro:
2167 \c ; Macro to access BIOS variables by their names (from tBDA):
2169 \c %define BDA(x) BDASTART + tBIOSDA. %+ x
2171 Now the above code can be written as:
2173 \c mov ax,BDA(COM1addr)
2174 \c mov bx,BDA(COM2addr)
2176 Using this feature, we can simplify references to a lot of macros (and,
2177 in turn, reduce typing errors).
2180 \S{selfref%?} The Macro Name Itself: \i\c{%?} and \i\c{%??}
2182 The special symbols \c{%?} and \c{%??} can be used to reference the
2183 macro name itself inside a macro expansion, this is supported for both
2184 single-and multi-line macros. \c{%?} refers to the macro name as
2185 \e{invoked}, whereas \c{%??} refers to the macro name as
2186 \e{declared}. The two are always the same for case-sensitive
2187 macros, but for case-insensitive macros, they can differ.
2191 \c %idefine Foo mov %?,%??
2203 \c %idefine keyword $%?
2205 can be used to make a keyword "disappear", for example in case a new
2206 instruction has been used as a label in older code. For example:
2208 \c %idefine pause $%? ; Hide the PAUSE instruction
2211 \S{undef} Undefining Single-Line Macros: \i\c{%undef}
2213 Single-line macros can be removed with the \c{%undef} directive. For
2214 example, the following sequence:
2221 will expand to the instruction \c{mov eax, foo}, since after
2222 \c{%undef} the macro \c{foo} is no longer defined.
2224 Macros that would otherwise be pre-defined can be undefined on the
2225 command-line using the `-u' option on the NASM command line: see
2229 \S{assign} \i{Preprocessor Variables}: \i\c{%assign}
2231 An alternative way to define single-line macros is by means of the
2232 \c{%assign} command (and its \I{case sensitive}case-insensitive
2233 counterpart \i\c{%iassign}, which differs from \c{%assign} in
2234 exactly the same way that \c{%idefine} differs from \c{%define}).
2236 \c{%assign} is used to define single-line macros which take no
2237 parameters and have a numeric value. This value can be specified in
2238 the form of an expression, and it will be evaluated once, when the
2239 \c{%assign} directive is processed.
2241 Like \c{%define}, macros defined using \c{%assign} can be re-defined
2242 later, so you can do things like
2246 to increment the numeric value of a macro.
2248 \c{%assign} is useful for controlling the termination of \c{%rep}
2249 preprocessor loops: see \k{rep} for an example of this. Another
2250 use for \c{%assign} is given in \k{16c} and \k{32c}.
2252 The expression passed to \c{%assign} is a \i{critical expression}
2253 (see \k{crit}), and must also evaluate to a pure number (rather than
2254 a relocatable reference such as a code or data address, or anything
2255 involving a register).
2258 \S{defstr} Defining Strings: \I\c{%idefstr}\i\c{%defstr}
2260 \c{%defstr}, and its case-insensitive counterpart \c{%idefstr}, define
2261 or redefine a single-line macro without parameters but converts the
2262 entire right-hand side, after macro expansion, to a quoted string
2267 \c %defstr test TEST
2271 \c %define test 'TEST'
2273 This can be used, for example, with the \c{%!} construct (see
2276 \c %defstr PATH %!PATH ; The operating system PATH variable
2279 \S{deftok} Defining Tokens: \I\c{%ideftok}\i\c{%deftok}
2281 \c{%deftok}, and its case-insensitive counterpart \c{%ideftok}, define
2282 or redefine a single-line macro without parameters but converts the
2283 second parameter, after string conversion, to a sequence of tokens.
2287 \c %deftok test 'TEST'
2291 \c %define test TEST
2294 \H{strlen} \i{String Manipulation in Macros}
2296 It's often useful to be able to handle strings in macros. NASM
2297 supports a few simple string handling macro operators from which
2298 more complex operations can be constructed.
2300 All the string operators define or redefine a value (either a string
2301 or a numeric value) to a single-line macro. When producing a string
2302 value, it may change the style of quoting of the input string or
2303 strings, and possibly use \c{\\}-escapes inside \c{`}-quoted strings.
2305 \S{strcat} \i{Concatenating Strings}: \i\c{%strcat}
2307 The \c{%strcat} operator concatenates quoted strings and assign them to
2308 a single-line macro.
2312 \c %strcat alpha "Alpha: ", '12" screen'
2314 ... would assign the value \c{'Alpha: 12" screen'} to \c{alpha}.
2317 \c %strcat beta '"foo"\', "'bar'"
2319 ... would assign the value \c{`"foo"\\\\'bar'`} to \c{beta}.
2321 The use of commas to separate strings is permitted but optional.
2324 \S{strlen} \i{String Length}: \i\c{%strlen}
2326 The \c{%strlen} operator assigns the length of a string to a macro.
2329 \c %strlen charcnt 'my string'
2331 In this example, \c{charcnt} would receive the value 9, just as
2332 if an \c{%assign} had been used. In this example, \c{'my string'}
2333 was a literal string but it could also have been a single-line
2334 macro that expands to a string, as in the following example:
2336 \c %define sometext 'my string'
2337 \c %strlen charcnt sometext
2339 As in the first case, this would result in \c{charcnt} being
2340 assigned the value of 9.
2343 \S{substr} \i{Extracting Substrings}: \i\c{%substr}
2345 Individual letters or substrings in strings can be extracted using the
2346 \c{%substr} operator. An example of its use is probably more useful
2347 than the description:
2349 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 1 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'x'
2350 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'y'
2351 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 3 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'z'
2352 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yz'
2353 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,-1 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yzw'
2354 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,-2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yz'
2356 As with \c{%strlen} (see \k{strlen}), the first parameter is the
2357 single-line macro to be created and the second is the string. The
2358 third parameter specifies the first character to be selected, and the
2359 optional fourth parameter preceeded by comma) is the length. Note
2360 that the first index is 1, not 0 and the last index is equal to the
2361 value that \c{%strlen} would assign given the same string. Index
2362 values out of range result in an empty string. A negative length
2363 means "until N-1 characters before the end of string", i.e. \c{-1}
2364 means until end of string, \c{-2} until one character before, etc.
2367 \H{mlmacro} \i{Multi-Line Macros}: \I\c{%imacro}\i\c{%macro}
2369 Multi-line macros are much more like the type of macro seen in MASM
2370 and TASM: a multi-line macro definition in NASM looks something like
2373 \c %macro prologue 1
2381 This defines a C-like function prologue as a macro: so you would
2382 invoke the macro with a call such as
2384 \c myfunc: prologue 12
2386 which would expand to the three lines of code
2392 The number \c{1} after the macro name in the \c{%macro} line defines
2393 the number of parameters the macro \c{prologue} expects to receive.
2394 The use of \c{%1} inside the macro definition refers to the first
2395 parameter to the macro call. With a macro taking more than one
2396 parameter, subsequent parameters would be referred to as \c{%2},
2399 Multi-line macros, like single-line macros, are \i{case-sensitive},
2400 unless you define them using the alternative directive \c{%imacro}.
2402 If you need to pass a comma as \e{part} of a parameter to a
2403 multi-line macro, you can do that by enclosing the entire parameter
2404 in \I{braces, around macro parameters}braces. So you could code
2413 \c silly 'a', letter_a ; letter_a: db 'a'
2414 \c silly 'ab', string_ab ; string_ab: db 'ab'
2415 \c silly {13,10}, crlf ; crlf: db 13,10
2418 \#\S{mlrmacro} \i{Recursive Multi-Line Macros}: \I\c{%irmacro}\i\c{%rmacro}
2420 \#A multi-line macro cannot be referenced within itself, in order to
2421 \#prevent accidental infinite recursion.
2423 \#Recursive multi-line macros allow for self-referencing, with the
2424 \#caveat that the user is aware of the existence, use and purpose of
2425 \#recursive multi-line macros. There is also a generous, but sane, upper
2426 \#limit to the number of recursions, in order to prevent run-away memory
2427 \#consumption in case of accidental infinite recursion.
2429 \#As with non-recursive multi-line macros, recursive multi-line macros are
2430 \#\i{case-sensitive}, unless you define them using the alternative
2431 \#directive \c{%irmacro}.
2433 \S{mlmacover} Overloading Multi-Line Macros\I{overloading, multi-line macros}
2435 As with single-line macros, multi-line macros can be overloaded by
2436 defining the same macro name several times with different numbers of
2437 parameters. This time, no exception is made for macros with no
2438 parameters at all. So you could define
2440 \c %macro prologue 0
2447 to define an alternative form of the function prologue which
2448 allocates no local stack space.
2450 Sometimes, however, you might want to `overload' a machine
2451 instruction; for example, you might want to define
2460 so that you could code
2462 \c push ebx ; this line is not a macro call
2463 \c push eax,ecx ; but this one is
2465 Ordinarily, NASM will give a warning for the first of the above two
2466 lines, since \c{push} is now defined to be a macro, and is being
2467 invoked with a number of parameters for which no definition has been
2468 given. The correct code will still be generated, but the assembler
2469 will give a warning. This warning can be disabled by the use of the
2470 \c{-w-macro-params} command-line option (see \k{opt-w}).
2473 \S{maclocal} \i{Macro-Local Labels}
2475 NASM allows you to define labels within a multi-line macro
2476 definition in such a way as to make them local to the macro call: so
2477 calling the same macro multiple times will use a different label
2478 each time. You do this by prefixing \i\c{%%} to the label name. So
2479 you can invent an instruction which executes a \c{RET} if the \c{Z}
2480 flag is set by doing this:
2490 You can call this macro as many times as you want, and every time
2491 you call it NASM will make up a different `real' name to substitute
2492 for the label \c{%%skip}. The names NASM invents are of the form
2493 \c{..@2345.skip}, where the number 2345 changes with every macro
2494 call. The \i\c{..@} prefix prevents macro-local labels from
2495 interfering with the local label mechanism, as described in
2496 \k{locallab}. You should avoid defining your own labels in this form
2497 (the \c{..@} prefix, then a number, then another period) in case
2498 they interfere with macro-local labels.
2501 \S{mlmacgre} \i{Greedy Macro Parameters}
2503 Occasionally it is useful to define a macro which lumps its entire
2504 command line into one parameter definition, possibly after
2505 extracting one or two smaller parameters from the front. An example
2506 might be a macro to write a text string to a file in MS-DOS, where
2507 you might want to be able to write
2509 \c writefile [filehandle],"hello, world",13,10
2511 NASM allows you to define the last parameter of a macro to be
2512 \e{greedy}, meaning that if you invoke the macro with more
2513 parameters than it expects, all the spare parameters get lumped into
2514 the last defined one along with the separating commas. So if you
2517 \c %macro writefile 2+
2523 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
2530 then the example call to \c{writefile} above will work as expected:
2531 the text before the first comma, \c{[filehandle]}, is used as the
2532 first macro parameter and expanded when \c{%1} is referred to, and
2533 all the subsequent text is lumped into \c{%2} and placed after the
2536 The greedy nature of the macro is indicated to NASM by the use of
2537 the \I{+ modifier}\c{+} sign after the parameter count on the
2540 If you define a greedy macro, you are effectively telling NASM how
2541 it should expand the macro given \e{any} number of parameters from
2542 the actual number specified up to infinity; in this case, for
2543 example, NASM now knows what to do when it sees a call to
2544 \c{writefile} with 2, 3, 4 or more parameters. NASM will take this
2545 into account when overloading macros, and will not allow you to
2546 define another form of \c{writefile} taking 4 parameters (for
2549 Of course, the above macro could have been implemented as a
2550 non-greedy macro, in which case the call to it would have had to
2553 \c writefile [filehandle], {"hello, world",13,10}
2555 NASM provides both mechanisms for putting \i{commas in macro
2556 parameters}, and you choose which one you prefer for each macro
2559 See \k{sectmac} for a better way to write the above macro.
2561 \S{mlmacrange} \i{Macro Parameters Range}
2563 NASM also allows you to expand parameters via special construction \c{%\{x:y\}}
2564 where \c{x} is the first parameter index and \c{y} is the last. Any index can
2565 be either negative or positive. Though the indices must never be zero.
2575 expands to \c{3,4,5} range.
2577 Even more, the parameters can be reversed so that
2585 expands to \c{5,4,3} range.
2587 But even this is not the last. The parameters can be addressed via negative
2588 indices so NASM will count them reversed. The ones who know Python may see
2597 expands to \c{6,5,4} range.
2599 Note that NASM uses \i{comma} to separate parameters being expanded.
2601 By the way, here is a trick - you might use the index \c{%{-1:-1}} gives
2602 you the \i{last} argument passed to a macro.
2604 \S{mlmacdef} \i{Default Macro Parameters}
2606 NASM also allows you to define a multi-line macro with a \e{range}
2607 of allowable parameter counts. If you do this, you can specify
2608 defaults for \i{omitted parameters}. So, for example:
2610 \c %macro die 0-1 "Painful program death has occurred."
2618 This macro (which makes use of the \c{writefile} macro defined in
2619 \k{mlmacgre}) can be called with an explicit error message, which it
2620 will display on the error output stream before exiting, or it can be
2621 called with no parameters, in which case it will use the default
2622 error message supplied in the macro definition.
2624 In general, you supply a minimum and maximum number of parameters
2625 for a macro of this type; the minimum number of parameters are then
2626 required in the macro call, and then you provide defaults for the
2627 optional ones. So if a macro definition began with the line
2629 \c %macro foobar 1-3 eax,[ebx+2]
2631 then it could be called with between one and three parameters, and
2632 \c{%1} would always be taken from the macro call. \c{%2}, if not
2633 specified by the macro call, would default to \c{eax}, and \c{%3} if
2634 not specified would default to \c{[ebx+2]}.
2636 You can provide extra information to a macro by providing
2637 too many default parameters:
2639 \c %macro quux 1 something
2641 This will trigger a warning by default; see \k{opt-w} for
2643 When \c{quux} is invoked, it receives not one but two parameters.
2644 \c{something} can be referred to as \c{%2}. The difference
2645 between passing \c{something} this way and writing \c{something}
2646 in the macro body is that with this way \c{something} is evaluated
2647 when the macro is defined, not when it is expanded.
2649 You may omit parameter defaults from the macro definition, in which
2650 case the parameter default is taken to be blank. This can be useful
2651 for macros which can take a variable number of parameters, since the
2652 \i\c{%0} token (see \k{percent0}) allows you to determine how many
2653 parameters were really passed to the macro call.
2655 This defaulting mechanism can be combined with the greedy-parameter
2656 mechanism; so the \c{die} macro above could be made more powerful,
2657 and more useful, by changing the first line of the definition to
2659 \c %macro die 0-1+ "Painful program death has occurred.",13,10
2661 The maximum parameter count can be infinite, denoted by \c{*}. In
2662 this case, of course, it is impossible to provide a \e{full} set of
2663 default parameters. Examples of this usage are shown in \k{rotate}.
2666 \S{percent0} \i\c{%0}: \I{counting macro parameters}Macro Parameter Counter
2668 The parameter reference \c{%0} will return a numeric constant giving the
2669 number of parameters received, that is, if \c{%0} is n then \c{%}n is the
2670 last parameter. \c{%0} is mostly useful for macros that can take a variable
2671 number of parameters. It can be used as an argument to \c{%rep}
2672 (see \k{rep}) in order to iterate through all the parameters of a macro.
2673 Examples are given in \k{rotate}.
2676 \S{rotate} \i\c{%rotate}: \i{Rotating Macro Parameters}
2678 Unix shell programmers will be familiar with the \I{shift
2679 command}\c{shift} shell command, which allows the arguments passed
2680 to a shell script (referenced as \c{$1}, \c{$2} and so on) to be
2681 moved left by one place, so that the argument previously referenced
2682 as \c{$2} becomes available as \c{$1}, and the argument previously
2683 referenced as \c{$1} is no longer available at all.
2685 NASM provides a similar mechanism, in the form of \c{%rotate}. As
2686 its name suggests, it differs from the Unix \c{shift} in that no
2687 parameters are lost: parameters rotated off the left end of the
2688 argument list reappear on the right, and vice versa.
2690 \c{%rotate} is invoked with a single numeric argument (which may be
2691 an expression). The macro parameters are rotated to the left by that
2692 many places. If the argument to \c{%rotate} is negative, the macro
2693 parameters are rotated to the right.
2695 \I{iterating over macro parameters}So a pair of macros to save and
2696 restore a set of registers might work as follows:
2698 \c %macro multipush 1-*
2707 This macro invokes the \c{PUSH} instruction on each of its arguments
2708 in turn, from left to right. It begins by pushing its first
2709 argument, \c{%1}, then invokes \c{%rotate} to move all the arguments
2710 one place to the left, so that the original second argument is now
2711 available as \c{%1}. Repeating this procedure as many times as there
2712 were arguments (achieved by supplying \c{%0} as the argument to
2713 \c{%rep}) causes each argument in turn to be pushed.
2715 Note also the use of \c{*} as the maximum parameter count,
2716 indicating that there is no upper limit on the number of parameters
2717 you may supply to the \i\c{multipush} macro.
2719 It would be convenient, when using this macro, to have a \c{POP}
2720 equivalent, which \e{didn't} require the arguments to be given in
2721 reverse order. Ideally, you would write the \c{multipush} macro
2722 call, then cut-and-paste the line to where the pop needed to be
2723 done, and change the name of the called macro to \c{multipop}, and
2724 the macro would take care of popping the registers in the opposite
2725 order from the one in which they were pushed.
2727 This can be done by the following definition:
2729 \c %macro multipop 1-*
2738 This macro begins by rotating its arguments one place to the
2739 \e{right}, so that the original \e{last} argument appears as \c{%1}.
2740 This is then popped, and the arguments are rotated right again, so
2741 the second-to-last argument becomes \c{%1}. Thus the arguments are
2742 iterated through in reverse order.
2745 \S{concat} \i{Concatenating Macro Parameters}
2747 NASM can concatenate macro parameters and macro indirection constructs
2748 on to other text surrounding them. This allows you to declare a family
2749 of symbols, for example, in a macro definition. If, for example, you
2750 wanted to generate a table of key codes along with offsets into the
2751 table, you could code something like
2753 \c %macro keytab_entry 2
2755 \c keypos%1 equ $-keytab
2761 \c keytab_entry F1,128+1
2762 \c keytab_entry F2,128+2
2763 \c keytab_entry Return,13
2765 which would expand to
2768 \c keyposF1 equ $-keytab
2770 \c keyposF2 equ $-keytab
2772 \c keyposReturn equ $-keytab
2775 You can just as easily concatenate text on to the other end of a
2776 macro parameter, by writing \c{%1foo}.
2778 If you need to append a \e{digit} to a macro parameter, for example
2779 defining labels \c{foo1} and \c{foo2} when passed the parameter
2780 \c{foo}, you can't code \c{%11} because that would be taken as the
2781 eleventh macro parameter. Instead, you must code
2782 \I{braces, after % sign}\c{%\{1\}1}, which will separate the first
2783 \c{1} (giving the number of the macro parameter) from the second
2784 (literal text to be concatenated to the parameter).
2786 This concatenation can also be applied to other preprocessor in-line
2787 objects, such as macro-local labels (\k{maclocal}) and context-local
2788 labels (\k{ctxlocal}). In all cases, ambiguities in syntax can be
2789 resolved by enclosing everything after the \c{%} sign and before the
2790 literal text in braces: so \c{%\{%foo\}bar} concatenates the text
2791 \c{bar} to the end of the real name of the macro-local label
2792 \c{%%foo}. (This is unnecessary, since the form NASM uses for the
2793 real names of macro-local labels means that the two usages
2794 \c{%\{%foo\}bar} and \c{%%foobar} would both expand to the same
2795 thing anyway; nevertheless, the capability is there.)
2797 The single-line macro indirection construct, \c{%[...]}
2798 (\k{indmacro}), behaves the same way as macro parameters for the
2799 purpose of concatenation.
2801 See also the \c{%+} operator, \k{concat%+}.
2804 \S{mlmaccc} \i{Condition Codes as Macro Parameters}
2806 NASM can give special treatment to a macro parameter which contains
2807 a condition code. For a start, you can refer to the macro parameter
2808 \c{%1} by means of the alternative syntax \i\c{%+1}, which informs
2809 NASM that this macro parameter is supposed to contain a condition
2810 code, and will cause the preprocessor to report an error message if
2811 the macro is called with a parameter which is \e{not} a valid
2814 Far more usefully, though, you can refer to the macro parameter by
2815 means of \i\c{%-1}, which NASM will expand as the \e{inverse}
2816 condition code. So the \c{retz} macro defined in \k{maclocal} can be
2817 replaced by a general \i{conditional-return macro} like this:
2827 This macro can now be invoked using calls like \c{retc ne}, which
2828 will cause the conditional-jump instruction in the macro expansion
2829 to come out as \c{JE}, or \c{retc po} which will make the jump a
2832 The \c{%+1} macro-parameter reference is quite happy to interpret
2833 the arguments \c{CXZ} and \c{ECXZ} as valid condition codes;
2834 however, \c{%-1} will report an error if passed either of these,
2835 because no inverse condition code exists.
2838 \S{nolist} \i{Disabling Listing Expansion}\I\c{.nolist}
2840 When NASM is generating a listing file from your program, it will
2841 generally expand multi-line macros by means of writing the macro
2842 call and then listing each line of the expansion. This allows you to
2843 see which instructions in the macro expansion are generating what
2844 code; however, for some macros this clutters the listing up
2847 NASM therefore provides the \c{.nolist} qualifier, which you can
2848 include in a macro definition to inhibit the expansion of the macro
2849 in the listing file. The \c{.nolist} qualifier comes directly after
2850 the number of parameters, like this:
2852 \c %macro foo 1.nolist
2856 \c %macro bar 1-5+.nolist a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h
2858 \S{unmacro} Undefining Multi-Line Macros: \i\c{%unmacro}
2860 Multi-line macros can be removed with the \c{%unmacro} directive.
2861 Unlike the \c{%undef} directive, however, \c{%unmacro} takes an
2862 argument specification, and will only remove \i{exact matches} with
2863 that argument specification.
2872 removes the previously defined macro \c{foo}, but
2879 does \e{not} remove the macro \c{bar}, since the argument
2880 specification does not match exactly.
2883 \#\S{exitmacro} Exiting Multi-Line Macros: \i\c{%exitmacro}
2885 \#Multi-line macro expansions can be arbitrarily terminated with
2886 \#the \c{%exitmacro} directive.
2898 \H{condasm} \i{Conditional Assembly}\I\c{%if}
2900 Similarly to the C preprocessor, NASM allows sections of a source
2901 file to be assembled only if certain conditions are met. The general
2902 syntax of this feature looks like this:
2905 \c ; some code which only appears if <condition> is met
2906 \c %elif<condition2>
2907 \c ; only appears if <condition> is not met but <condition2> is
2909 \c ; this appears if neither <condition> nor <condition2> was met
2912 The inverse forms \i\c{%ifn} and \i\c{%elifn} are also supported.
2914 The \i\c{%else} clause is optional, as is the \i\c{%elif} clause.
2915 You can have more than one \c{%elif} clause as well.
2917 There are a number of variants of the \c{%if} directive. Each has its
2918 corresponding \c{%elif}, \c{%ifn}, and \c{%elifn} directives; for
2919 example, the equivalents to the \c{%ifdef} directive are \c{%elifdef},
2920 \c{%ifndef}, and \c{%elifndef}.
2922 \S{ifdef} \i\c{%ifdef}: Testing Single-Line Macro Existence\I{testing,
2923 single-line macro existence}
2925 Beginning a conditional-assembly block with the line \c{%ifdef
2926 MACRO} will assemble the subsequent code if, and only if, a
2927 single-line macro called \c{MACRO} is defined. If not, then the
2928 \c{%elif} and \c{%else} blocks (if any) will be processed instead.
2930 For example, when debugging a program, you might want to write code
2933 \c ; perform some function
2935 \c writefile 2,"Function performed successfully",13,10
2937 \c ; go and do something else
2939 Then you could use the command-line option \c{-dDEBUG} to create a
2940 version of the program which produced debugging messages, and remove
2941 the option to generate the final release version of the program.
2943 You can test for a macro \e{not} being defined by using
2944 \i\c{%ifndef} instead of \c{%ifdef}. You can also test for macro
2945 definitions in \c{%elif} blocks by using \i\c{%elifdef} and
2949 \S{ifmacro} \i\c{%ifmacro}: Testing Multi-Line Macro
2950 Existence\I{testing, multi-line macro existence}
2952 The \c{%ifmacro} directive operates in the same way as the \c{%ifdef}
2953 directive, except that it checks for the existence of a multi-line macro.
2955 For example, you may be working with a large project and not have control
2956 over the macros in a library. You may want to create a macro with one
2957 name if it doesn't already exist, and another name if one with that name
2960 The \c{%ifmacro} is considered true if defining a macro with the given name
2961 and number of arguments would cause a definitions conflict. For example:
2963 \c %ifmacro MyMacro 1-3
2965 \c %error "MyMacro 1-3" causes a conflict with an existing macro.
2969 \c %macro MyMacro 1-3
2971 \c ; insert code to define the macro
2977 This will create the macro "MyMacro 1-3" if no macro already exists which
2978 would conflict with it, and emits a warning if there would be a definition
2981 You can test for the macro not existing by using the \i\c{%ifnmacro} instead
2982 of \c{%ifmacro}. Additional tests can be performed in \c{%elif} blocks by using
2983 \i\c{%elifmacro} and \i\c{%elifnmacro}.
2986 \S{ifctx} \i\c{%ifctx}: Testing the Context Stack\I{testing, context
2989 The conditional-assembly construct \c{%ifctx} will cause the
2990 subsequent code to be assembled if and only if the top context on
2991 the preprocessor's context stack has the same name as one of the arguments.
2992 As with \c{%ifdef}, the inverse and \c{%elif} forms \i\c{%ifnctx},
2993 \i\c{%elifctx} and \i\c{%elifnctx} are also supported.
2995 For more details of the context stack, see \k{ctxstack}. For a
2996 sample use of \c{%ifctx}, see \k{blockif}.
2999 \S{if} \i\c{%if}: Testing Arbitrary Numeric Expressions\I{testing,
3000 arbitrary numeric expressions}
3002 The conditional-assembly construct \c{%if expr} will cause the
3003 subsequent code to be assembled if and only if the value of the
3004 numeric expression \c{expr} is non-zero. An example of the use of
3005 this feature is in deciding when to break out of a \c{%rep}
3006 preprocessor loop: see \k{rep} for a detailed example.
3008 The expression given to \c{%if}, and its counterpart \i\c{%elif}, is
3009 a critical expression (see \k{crit}).
3011 \c{%if} extends the normal NASM expression syntax, by providing a
3012 set of \i{relational operators} which are not normally available in
3013 expressions. The operators \i\c{=}, \i\c{<}, \i\c{>}, \i\c{<=},
3014 \i\c{>=} and \i\c{<>} test equality, less-than, greater-than,
3015 less-or-equal, greater-or-equal and not-equal respectively. The
3016 C-like forms \i\c{==} and \i\c{!=} are supported as alternative
3017 forms of \c{=} and \c{<>}. In addition, low-priority logical
3018 operators \i\c{&&}, \i\c{^^} and \i\c{||} are provided, supplying
3019 \i{logical AND}, \i{logical XOR} and \i{logical OR}. These work like
3020 the C logical operators (although C has no logical XOR), in that
3021 they always return either 0 or 1, and treat any non-zero input as 1
3022 (so that \c{^^}, for example, returns 1 if exactly one of its inputs
3023 is zero, and 0 otherwise). The relational operators also return 1
3024 for true and 0 for false.
3026 Like other \c{%if} constructs, \c{%if} has a counterpart
3027 \i\c{%elif}, and negative forms \i\c{%ifn} and \i\c{%elifn}.
3029 \S{ifidn} \i\c{%ifidn} and \i\c{%ifidni}: Testing Exact Text
3030 Identity\I{testing, exact text identity}
3032 The construct \c{%ifidn text1,text2} will cause the subsequent code
3033 to be assembled if and only if \c{text1} and \c{text2}, after
3034 expanding single-line macros, are identical pieces of text.
3035 Differences in white space are not counted.
3037 \c{%ifidni} is similar to \c{%ifidn}, but is \i{case-insensitive}.
3039 For example, the following macro pushes a register or number on the
3040 stack, and allows you to treat \c{IP} as a real register:
3042 \c %macro pushparam 1
3053 Like other \c{%if} constructs, \c{%ifidn} has a counterpart
3054 \i\c{%elifidn}, and negative forms \i\c{%ifnidn} and \i\c{%elifnidn}.
3055 Similarly, \c{%ifidni} has counterparts \i\c{%elifidni},
3056 \i\c{%ifnidni} and \i\c{%elifnidni}.
3058 \S{iftyp} \i\c{%ifid}, \i\c{%ifnum}, \i\c{%ifstr}: Testing Token
3059 Types\I{testing, token types}
3061 Some macros will want to perform different tasks depending on
3062 whether they are passed a number, a string, or an identifier. For
3063 example, a string output macro might want to be able to cope with
3064 being passed either a string constant or a pointer to an existing
3067 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifid}, taking one parameter
3068 (which may be blank), assembles the subsequent code if and only if
3069 the first token in the parameter exists and is an identifier.
3070 \c{%ifnum} works similarly, but tests for the token being a numeric
3071 constant; \c{%ifstr} tests for it being a string.
3073 For example, the \c{writefile} macro defined in \k{mlmacgre} can be
3074 extended to take advantage of \c{%ifstr} in the following fashion:
3076 \c %macro writefile 2-3+
3085 \c %%endstr: mov dx,%%str
3086 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
3097 Then the \c{writefile} macro can cope with being called in either of
3098 the following two ways:
3100 \c writefile [file], strpointer, length
3101 \c writefile [file], "hello", 13, 10
3103 In the first, \c{strpointer} is used as the address of an
3104 already-declared string, and \c{length} is used as its length; in
3105 the second, a string is given to the macro, which therefore declares
3106 it itself and works out the address and length for itself.
3108 Note the use of \c{%if} inside the \c{%ifstr}: this is to detect
3109 whether the macro was passed two arguments (so the string would be a
3110 single string constant, and \c{db %2} would be adequate) or more (in
3111 which case, all but the first two would be lumped together into
3112 \c{%3}, and \c{db %2,%3} would be required).
3114 The usual \I\c{%elifid}\I\c{%elifnum}\I\c{%elifstr}\c{%elif}...,
3115 \I\c{%ifnid}\I\c{%ifnnum}\I\c{%ifnstr}\c{%ifn}..., and
3116 \I\c{%elifnid}\I\c{%elifnnum}\I\c{%elifnstr}\c{%elifn}... versions
3117 exist for each of \c{%ifid}, \c{%ifnum} and \c{%ifstr}.
3119 \S{iftoken} \i\c{%iftoken}: Test for a Single Token
3121 Some macros will want to do different things depending on if it is
3122 passed a single token (e.g. paste it to something else using \c{%+})
3123 versus a multi-token sequence.
3125 The conditional assembly construct \c{%iftoken} assembles the
3126 subsequent code if and only if the expanded parameters consist of
3127 exactly one token, possibly surrounded by whitespace.
3133 will assemble the subsequent code, but
3137 will not, since \c{-1} contains two tokens: the unary minus operator
3138 \c{-}, and the number \c{1}.
3140 The usual \i\c{%eliftoken}, \i\c\{%ifntoken}, and \i\c{%elifntoken}
3141 variants are also provided.
3143 \S{ifempty} \i\c{%ifempty}: Test for Empty Expansion
3145 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifempty} assembles the
3146 subsequent code if and only if the expanded parameters do not contain
3147 any tokens at all, whitespace excepted.
3149 The usual \i\c{%elifempty}, \i\c\{%ifnempty}, and \i\c{%elifnempty}
3150 variants are also provided.
3152 \S{ifenv} \i\c{%ifenv}: Test If Environment Variable Exists
3154 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifenv} assembles the
3155 subsequent code if and only if the environment variable referenced by
3156 the \c{%!<env>} directive exists.
3158 The usual \i\c{%elifenv}, \i\c\{%ifnenv}, and \i\c{%elifnenv}
3159 variants are also provided.
3161 \H{rep} \i{Preprocessor Loops}\I{repeating code}: \i\c{%rep}
3163 NASM's \c{TIMES} prefix, though useful, cannot be used to invoke a
3164 multi-line macro multiple times, because it is processed by NASM
3165 after macros have already been expanded. Therefore NASM provides
3166 another form of loop, this time at the preprocessor level: \c{%rep}.
3168 The directives \c{%rep} and \i\c{%endrep} (\c{%rep} takes a numeric
3169 argument, which can be an expression; \c{%endrep} takes no
3170 arguments) can be used to enclose a chunk of code, which is then
3171 replicated as many times as specified by the preprocessor:
3175 \c inc word [table+2*i]
3179 This will generate a sequence of 64 \c{INC} instructions,
3180 incrementing every word of memory from \c{[table]} to
3183 For more complex termination conditions, or to break out of a repeat
3184 loop part way along, you can use the \i\c{%exitrep} directive to
3185 terminate the loop, like this:
3200 \c fib_number equ ($-fibonacci)/2
3202 This produces a list of all the Fibonacci numbers that will fit in
3203 16 bits. Note that a maximum repeat count must still be given to
3204 \c{%rep}. This is to prevent the possibility of NASM getting into an
3205 infinite loop in the preprocessor, which (on multitasking or
3206 multi-user systems) would typically cause all the system memory to
3207 be gradually used up and other applications to start crashing.
3210 \H{files} Source Files and Dependencies
3212 These commands allow you to split your sources into multiple files.
3214 \S{include} \i\c{%include}: \i{Including Other Files}
3216 Using, once again, a very similar syntax to the C preprocessor,
3217 NASM's preprocessor lets you include other source files into your
3218 code. This is done by the use of the \i\c{%include} directive:
3220 \c %include "macros.mac"
3222 will include the contents of the file \c{macros.mac} into the source
3223 file containing the \c{%include} directive.
3225 Include files are \I{searching for include files}searched for in the
3226 current directory (the directory you're in when you run NASM, as
3227 opposed to the location of the NASM executable or the location of
3228 the source file), plus any directories specified on the NASM command
3229 line using the \c{-i} option.
3231 The standard C idiom for preventing a file being included more than
3232 once is just as applicable in NASM: if the file \c{macros.mac} has
3235 \c %ifndef MACROS_MAC
3236 \c %define MACROS_MAC
3237 \c ; now define some macros
3240 then including the file more than once will not cause errors,
3241 because the second time the file is included nothing will happen
3242 because the macro \c{MACROS_MAC} will already be defined.
3244 You can force a file to be included even if there is no \c{%include}
3245 directive that explicitly includes it, by using the \i\c{-p} option
3246 on the NASM command line (see \k{opt-p}).
3249 \S{pathsearch} \i\c{%pathsearch}: Search the Include Path
3251 The \c{%pathsearch} directive takes a single-line macro name and a
3252 filename, and declare or redefines the specified single-line macro to
3253 be the include-path-resolved version of the filename, if the file
3254 exists (otherwise, it is passed unchanged.)
3258 \c %pathsearch MyFoo "foo.bin"
3260 ... with \c{-Ibins/} in the include path may end up defining the macro
3261 \c{MyFoo} to be \c{"bins/foo.bin"}.
3264 \S{depend} \i\c{%depend}: Add Dependent Files
3266 The \c{%depend} directive takes a filename and adds it to the list of
3267 files to be emitted as dependency generation when the \c{-M} options
3268 and its relatives (see \k{opt-M}) are used. It produces no output.
3270 This is generally used in conjunction with \c{%pathsearch}. For
3271 example, a simplified version of the standard macro wrapper for the
3272 \c{INCBIN} directive looks like:
3274 \c %imacro incbin 1-2+ 0
3275 \c %pathsearch dep %1
3280 This first resolves the location of the file into the macro \c{dep},
3281 then adds it to the dependency lists, and finally issues the
3282 assembler-level \c{INCBIN} directive.
3285 \S{use} \i\c{%use}: Include Standard Macro Package
3287 The \c{%use} directive is similar to \c{%include}, but rather than
3288 including the contents of a file, it includes a named standard macro
3289 package. The standard macro packages are part of NASM, and are
3290 described in \k{macropkg}.
3292 Unlike the \c{%include} directive, package names for the \c{%use}
3293 directive do not require quotes, but quotes are permitted. In NASM
3294 2.04 and 2.05 the unquoted form would be macro-expanded; this is no
3295 longer true. Thus, the following lines are equivalent:
3300 Standard macro packages are protected from multiple inclusion. When a
3301 standard macro package is used, a testable single-line macro of the
3302 form \c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__} is also defined, see \k{use_def}.
3304 \H{ctxstack} The \i{Context Stack}
3306 Having labels that are local to a macro definition is sometimes not
3307 quite powerful enough: sometimes you want to be able to share labels
3308 between several macro calls. An example might be a \c{REPEAT} ...
3309 \c{UNTIL} loop, in which the expansion of the \c{REPEAT} macro
3310 would need to be able to refer to a label which the \c{UNTIL} macro
3311 had defined. However, for such a macro you would also want to be
3312 able to nest these loops.
3314 NASM provides this level of power by means of a \e{context stack}.
3315 The preprocessor maintains a stack of \e{contexts}, each of which is
3316 characterized by a name. You add a new context to the stack using
3317 the \i\c{%push} directive, and remove one using \i\c{%pop}. You can
3318 define labels that are local to a particular context on the stack.
3321 \S{pushpop} \i\c{%push} and \i\c{%pop}: \I{creating
3322 contexts}\I{removing contexts}Creating and Removing Contexts
3324 The \c{%push} directive is used to create a new context and place it
3325 on the top of the context stack. \c{%push} takes an optional argument,
3326 which is the name of the context. For example:
3330 This pushes a new context called \c{foobar} on the stack. You can have
3331 several contexts on the stack with the same name: they can still be
3332 distinguished. If no name is given, the context is unnamed (this is
3333 normally used when both the \c{%push} and the \c{%pop} are inside a
3334 single macro definition.)
3336 The directive \c{%pop}, taking one optional argument, removes the top
3337 context from the context stack and destroys it, along with any
3338 labels associated with it. If an argument is given, it must match the
3339 name of the current context, otherwise it will issue an error.
3342 \S{ctxlocal} \i{Context-Local Labels}
3344 Just as the usage \c{%%foo} defines a label which is local to the
3345 particular macro call in which it is used, the usage \I{%$}\c{%$foo}
3346 is used to define a label which is local to the context on the top
3347 of the context stack. So the \c{REPEAT} and \c{UNTIL} example given
3348 above could be implemented by means of:
3364 and invoked by means of, for example,
3372 which would scan every fourth byte of a string in search of the byte
3375 If you need to define, or access, labels local to the context
3376 \e{below} the top one on the stack, you can use \I{%$$}\c{%$$foo}, or
3377 \c{%$$$foo} for the context below that, and so on.
3380 \S{ctxdefine} \i{Context-Local Single-Line Macros}
3382 NASM also allows you to define single-line macros which are local to
3383 a particular context, in just the same way:
3385 \c %define %$localmac 3
3387 will define the single-line macro \c{%$localmac} to be local to the
3388 top context on the stack. Of course, after a subsequent \c{%push},
3389 it can then still be accessed by the name \c{%$$localmac}.
3392 \S{ctxrepl} \i\c{%repl}: \I{renaming contexts}Renaming a Context
3394 If you need to change the name of the top context on the stack (in
3395 order, for example, to have it respond differently to \c{%ifctx}),
3396 you can execute a \c{%pop} followed by a \c{%push}; but this will
3397 have the side effect of destroying all context-local labels and
3398 macros associated with the context that was just popped.
3400 NASM provides the directive \c{%repl}, which \e{replaces} a context
3401 with a different name, without touching the associated macros and
3402 labels. So you could replace the destructive code
3407 with the non-destructive version \c{%repl newname}.
3410 \S{blockif} Example Use of the \i{Context Stack}: \i{Block IFs}
3412 This example makes use of almost all the context-stack features,
3413 including the conditional-assembly construct \i\c{%ifctx}, to
3414 implement a block IF statement as a set of macros.
3430 \c %error "expected `if' before `else'"
3444 \c %error "expected `if' or `else' before `endif'"
3449 This code is more robust than the \c{REPEAT} and \c{UNTIL} macros
3450 given in \k{ctxlocal}, because it uses conditional assembly to check
3451 that the macros are issued in the right order (for example, not
3452 calling \c{endif} before \c{if}) and issues a \c{%error} if they're
3455 In addition, the \c{endif} macro has to be able to cope with the two
3456 distinct cases of either directly following an \c{if}, or following
3457 an \c{else}. It achieves this, again, by using conditional assembly
3458 to do different things depending on whether the context on top of
3459 the stack is \c{if} or \c{else}.
3461 The \c{else} macro has to preserve the context on the stack, in
3462 order to have the \c{%$ifnot} referred to by the \c{if} macro be the
3463 same as the one defined by the \c{endif} macro, but has to change
3464 the context's name so that \c{endif} will know there was an
3465 intervening \c{else}. It does this by the use of \c{%repl}.
3467 A sample usage of these macros might look like:
3489 The block-\c{IF} macros handle nesting quite happily, by means of
3490 pushing another context, describing the inner \c{if}, on top of the
3491 one describing the outer \c{if}; thus \c{else} and \c{endif} always
3492 refer to the last unmatched \c{if} or \c{else}.
3495 \H{stackrel} \i{Stack Relative Preprocessor Directives}
3497 The following preprocessor directives provide a way to use
3498 labels to refer to local variables allocated on the stack.
3500 \b\c{%arg} (see \k{arg})
3502 \b\c{%stacksize} (see \k{stacksize})
3504 \b\c{%local} (see \k{local})
3507 \S{arg} \i\c{%arg} Directive
3509 The \c{%arg} directive is used to simplify the handling of
3510 parameters passed on the stack. Stack based parameter passing
3511 is used by many high level languages, including C, C++ and Pascal.
3513 While NASM has macros which attempt to duplicate this
3514 functionality (see \k{16cmacro}), the syntax is not particularly
3515 convenient to use and is not TASM compatible. Here is an example
3516 which shows the use of \c{%arg} without any external macros:
3520 \c %push mycontext ; save the current context
3521 \c %stacksize large ; tell NASM to use bp
3522 \c %arg i:word, j_ptr:word
3529 \c %pop ; restore original context
3531 This is similar to the procedure defined in \k{16cmacro} and adds
3532 the value in i to the value pointed to by j_ptr and returns the
3533 sum in the ax register. See \k{pushpop} for an explanation of
3534 \c{push} and \c{pop} and the use of context stacks.
3537 \S{stacksize} \i\c{%stacksize} Directive
3539 The \c{%stacksize} directive is used in conjunction with the
3540 \c{%arg} (see \k{arg}) and the \c{%local} (see \k{local}) directives.
3541 It tells NASM the default size to use for subsequent \c{%arg} and
3542 \c{%local} directives. The \c{%stacksize} directive takes one
3543 required argument which is one of \c{flat}, \c{flat64}, \c{large} or \c{small}.
3547 This form causes NASM to use stack-based parameter addressing
3548 relative to \c{ebp} and it assumes that a near form of call was used
3549 to get to this label (i.e. that \c{eip} is on the stack).
3551 \c %stacksize flat64
3553 This form causes NASM to use stack-based parameter addressing
3554 relative to \c{rbp} and it assumes that a near form of call was used
3555 to get to this label (i.e. that \c{rip} is on the stack).
3559 This form uses \c{bp} to do stack-based parameter addressing and
3560 assumes that a far form of call was used to get to this address
3561 (i.e. that \c{ip} and \c{cs} are on the stack).
3565 This form also uses \c{bp} to address stack parameters, but it is
3566 different from \c{large} because it also assumes that the old value
3567 of bp is pushed onto the stack (i.e. it expects an \c{ENTER}
3568 instruction). In other words, it expects that \c{bp}, \c{ip} and
3569 \c{cs} are on the top of the stack, underneath any local space which
3570 may have been allocated by \c{ENTER}. This form is probably most
3571 useful when used in combination with the \c{%local} directive
3575 \S{local} \i\c{%local} Directive
3577 The \c{%local} directive is used to simplify the use of local
3578 temporary stack variables allocated in a stack frame. Automatic
3579 local variables in C are an example of this kind of variable. The
3580 \c{%local} directive is most useful when used with the \c{%stacksize}
3581 (see \k{stacksize} and is also compatible with the \c{%arg} directive
3582 (see \k{arg}). It allows simplified reference to variables on the
3583 stack which have been allocated typically by using the \c{ENTER}
3585 \# (see \k{insENTER} for a description of that instruction).
3586 An example of its use is the following:
3590 \c %push mycontext ; save the current context
3591 \c %stacksize small ; tell NASM to use bp
3592 \c %assign %$localsize 0 ; see text for explanation
3593 \c %local old_ax:word, old_dx:word
3595 \c enter %$localsize,0 ; see text for explanation
3596 \c mov [old_ax],ax ; swap ax & bx
3597 \c mov [old_dx],dx ; and swap dx & cx
3602 \c leave ; restore old bp
3605 \c %pop ; restore original context
3607 The \c{%$localsize} variable is used internally by the
3608 \c{%local} directive and \e{must} be defined within the
3609 current context before the \c{%local} directive may be used.
3610 Failure to do so will result in one expression syntax error for
3611 each \c{%local} variable declared. It then may be used in
3612 the construction of an appropriately sized ENTER instruction
3613 as shown in the example.
3616 \H{pperror} Reporting \i{User-Defined Errors}: \i\c{%error}, \i\c{%warning}, \i\c{%fatal}
3618 The preprocessor directive \c{%error} will cause NASM to report an
3619 error if it occurs in assembled code. So if other users are going to
3620 try to assemble your source files, you can ensure that they define the
3621 right macros by means of code like this:
3626 \c ; do some different setup
3628 \c %error "Neither F1 nor F2 was defined."
3631 Then any user who fails to understand the way your code is supposed
3632 to be assembled will be quickly warned of their mistake, rather than
3633 having to wait until the program crashes on being run and then not
3634 knowing what went wrong.
3636 Similarly, \c{%warning} issues a warning, but allows assembly to continue:
3641 \c ; do some different setup
3643 \c %warning "Neither F1 nor F2 was defined, assuming F1."
3647 \c{%error} and \c{%warning} are issued only on the final assembly
3648 pass. This makes them safe to use in conjunction with tests that
3649 depend on symbol values.
3651 \c{%fatal} terminates assembly immediately, regardless of pass. This
3652 is useful when there is no point in continuing the assembly further,
3653 and doing so is likely just going to cause a spew of confusing error
3656 It is optional for the message string after \c{%error}, \c{%warning}
3657 or \c{%fatal} to be quoted. If it is \e{not}, then single-line macros
3658 are expanded in it, which can be used to display more information to
3659 the user. For example:
3662 \c %assign foo_over foo-64
3663 \c %error foo is foo_over bytes too large
3667 \H{otherpreproc} \i{Other Preprocessor Directives}
3669 NASM also has preprocessor directives which allow access to
3670 information from external sources. Currently they include:
3672 \b\c{%line} enables NASM to correctly handle the output of another
3673 preprocessor (see \k{line}).
3675 \b\c{%!} enables NASM to read in the value of an environment variable,
3676 which can then be used in your program (see \k{getenv}).
3678 \S{line} \i\c{%line} Directive
3680 The \c{%line} directive is used to notify NASM that the input line
3681 corresponds to a specific line number in another file. Typically
3682 this other file would be an original source file, with the current
3683 NASM input being the output of a pre-processor. The \c{%line}
3684 directive allows NASM to output messages which indicate the line
3685 number of the original source file, instead of the file that is being
3688 This preprocessor directive is not generally of use to programmers,
3689 by may be of interest to preprocessor authors. The usage of the
3690 \c{%line} preprocessor directive is as follows:
3692 \c %line nnn[+mmm] [filename]
3694 In this directive, \c{nnn} identifies the line of the original source
3695 file which this line corresponds to. \c{mmm} is an optional parameter
3696 which specifies a line increment value; each line of the input file
3697 read in is considered to correspond to \c{mmm} lines of the original
3698 source file. Finally, \c{filename} is an optional parameter which
3699 specifies the file name of the original source file.
3701 After reading a \c{%line} preprocessor directive, NASM will report
3702 all file name and line numbers relative to the values specified
3706 \S{getenv} \i\c{%!}\c{<env>}: Read an environment variable.
3708 The \c{%!<env>} directive makes it possible to read the value of an
3709 environment variable at assembly time. This could, for example, be used
3710 to store the contents of an environment variable into a string, which
3711 could be used at some other point in your code.
3713 For example, suppose that you have an environment variable \c{FOO}, and
3714 you want the contents of \c{FOO} to be embedded in your program. You
3715 could do that as follows:
3717 \c %defstr FOO %!FOO
3719 See \k{defstr} for notes on the \c{%defstr} directive.
3722 \H{stdmac} \i{Standard Macros}
3724 NASM defines a set of standard macros, which are already defined
3725 when it starts to process any source file. If you really need a
3726 program to be assembled with no pre-defined macros, you can use the
3727 \i\c{%clear} directive to empty the preprocessor of everything but
3728 context-local preprocessor variables and single-line macros.
3730 Most \i{user-level assembler directives} (see \k{directive}) are
3731 implemented as macros which invoke primitive directives; these are
3732 described in \k{directive}. The rest of the standard macro set is
3736 \S{stdmacver} \i{NASM Version} Macros
3738 The single-line macros \i\c{__NASM_MAJOR__}, \i\c{__NASM_MINOR__},
3739 \i\c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} and \i\c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} expand to the
3740 major, minor, subminor and patch level parts of the \i{version
3741 number of NASM} being used. So, under NASM 0.98.32p1 for
3742 example, \c{__NASM_MAJOR__} would be defined to be 0, \c{__NASM_MINOR__}
3743 would be defined as 98, \c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} would be defined to 32,
3744 and \c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} would be defined as 1.
3746 Additionally, the macro \i\c{__NASM_SNAPSHOT__} is defined for
3747 automatically generated snapshot releases \e{only}.
3750 \S{stdmacverid} \i\c{__NASM_VERSION_ID__}: \i{NASM Version ID}
3752 The single-line macro \c{__NASM_VERSION_ID__} expands to a dword integer
3753 representing the full version number of the version of nasm being used.
3754 The value is the equivalent to \c{__NASM_MAJOR__}, \c{__NASM_MINOR__},
3755 \c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} and \c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} concatenated to
3756 produce a single doubleword. Hence, for 0.98.32p1, the returned number
3757 would be equivalent to:
3765 Note that the above lines are generate exactly the same code, the second
3766 line is used just to give an indication of the order that the separate
3767 values will be present in memory.
3770 \S{stdmacverstr} \i\c{__NASM_VER__}: \i{NASM Version string}
3772 The single-line macro \c{__NASM_VER__} expands to a string which defines
3773 the version number of nasm being used. So, under NASM 0.98.32 for example,
3782 \S{fileline} \i\c{__FILE__} and \i\c{__LINE__}: File Name and Line Number
3784 Like the C preprocessor, NASM allows the user to find out the file
3785 name and line number containing the current instruction. The macro
3786 \c{__FILE__} expands to a string constant giving the name of the
3787 current input file (which may change through the course of assembly
3788 if \c{%include} directives are used), and \c{__LINE__} expands to a
3789 numeric constant giving the current line number in the input file.
3791 These macros could be used, for example, to communicate debugging
3792 information to a macro, since invoking \c{__LINE__} inside a macro
3793 definition (either single-line or multi-line) will return the line
3794 number of the macro \e{call}, rather than \e{definition}. So to
3795 determine where in a piece of code a crash is occurring, for
3796 example, one could write a routine \c{stillhere}, which is passed a
3797 line number in \c{EAX} and outputs something like `line 155: still
3798 here'. You could then write a macro
3800 \c %macro notdeadyet 0
3809 and then pepper your code with calls to \c{notdeadyet} until you
3810 find the crash point.
3813 \S{bitsm} \i\c{__BITS__}: Current BITS Mode
3815 The \c{__BITS__} standard macro is updated every time that the BITS mode is
3816 set using the \c{BITS XX} or \c{[BITS XX]} directive, where XX is a valid mode
3817 number of 16, 32 or 64. \c{__BITS__} receives the specified mode number and
3818 makes it globally available. This can be very useful for those who utilize
3819 mode-dependent macros.
3821 \S{ofmtm} \i\c{__OUTPUT_FORMAT__}: Current Output Format
3823 The \c{__OUTPUT_FORMAT__} standard macro holds the current Output Format,
3824 as given by the \c{-f} option or NASM's default. Type \c{nasm -hf} for a
3827 \c %ifidn __OUTPUT_FORMAT__, win32
3828 \c %define NEWLINE 13, 10
3829 \c %elifidn __OUTPUT_FORMAT__, elf32
3830 \c %define NEWLINE 10
3834 \S{datetime} Assembly Date and Time Macros
3836 NASM provides a variety of macros that represent the timestamp of the
3839 \b The \i\c{__DATE__} and \i\c{__TIME__} macros give the assembly date and
3840 time as strings, in ISO 8601 format (\c{"YYYY-MM-DD"} and \c{"HH:MM:SS"},
3843 \b The \i\c{__DATE_NUM__} and \i\c{__TIME_NUM__} macros give the assembly
3844 date and time in numeric form; in the format \c{YYYYMMDD} and
3845 \c{HHMMSS} respectively.
3847 \b The \i\c{__UTC_DATE__} and \i\c{__UTC_TIME__} macros give the assembly
3848 date and time in universal time (UTC) as strings, in ISO 8601 format
3849 (\c{"YYYY-MM-DD"} and \c{"HH:MM:SS"}, respectively.) If the host
3850 platform doesn't provide UTC time, these macros are undefined.
3852 \b The \i\c{__UTC_DATE_NUM__} and \i\c{__UTC_TIME_NUM__} macros give the
3853 assembly date and time universal time (UTC) in numeric form; in the
3854 format \c{YYYYMMDD} and \c{HHMMSS} respectively. If the
3855 host platform doesn't provide UTC time, these macros are
3858 \b The \c{__POSIX_TIME__} macro is defined as a number containing the
3859 number of seconds since the POSIX epoch, 1 January 1970 00:00:00 UTC;
3860 excluding any leap seconds. This is computed using UTC time if
3861 available on the host platform, otherwise it is computed using the
3862 local time as if it was UTC.
3864 All instances of time and date macros in the same assembly session
3865 produce consistent output. For example, in an assembly session
3866 started at 42 seconds after midnight on January 1, 2010 in Moscow
3867 (timezone UTC+3) these macros would have the following values,
3868 assuming, of course, a properly configured environment with a correct
3871 \c __DATE__ "2010-01-01"
3872 \c __TIME__ "00:00:42"
3873 \c __DATE_NUM__ 20100101
3874 \c __TIME_NUM__ 000042
3875 \c __UTC_DATE__ "2009-12-31"
3876 \c __UTC_TIME__ "21:00:42"
3877 \c __UTC_DATE_NUM__ 20091231
3878 \c __UTC_TIME_NUM__ 210042
3879 \c __POSIX_TIME__ 1262293242
3882 \S{use_def} \I\c{__USE_*__}\c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__}: Package
3885 When a standard macro package (see \k{macropkg}) is included with the
3886 \c{%use} directive (see \k{use}), a single-line macro of the form
3887 \c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__} is automatically defined. This allows
3888 testing if a particular package is invoked or not.
3890 For example, if the \c{altreg} package is included (see
3891 \k{pkg_altreg}), then the macro \c{__USE_ALTREG__} is defined.
3894 \S{pass_macro} \i\c{__PASS__}: Assembly Pass
3896 The macro \c{__PASS__} is defined to be \c{1} on preparatory passes,
3897 and \c{2} on the final pass. In preprocess-only mode, it is set to
3898 \c{3}, and when running only to generate dependencies (due to the
3899 \c{-M} or \c{-MG} option, see \k{opt-M}) it is set to \c{0}.
3901 \e{Avoid using this macro if at all possible. It is tremendously easy
3902 to generate very strange errors by misusing it, and the semantics may
3903 change in future versions of NASM.}
3906 \S{struc} \i\c{STRUC} and \i\c{ENDSTRUC}: \i{Declaring Structure} Data Types
3908 The core of NASM contains no intrinsic means of defining data
3909 structures; instead, the preprocessor is sufficiently powerful that
3910 data structures can be implemented as a set of macros. The macros
3911 \c{STRUC} and \c{ENDSTRUC} are used to define a structure data type.
3913 \c{STRUC} takes one or two parameters. The first parameter is the name
3914 of the data type. The second, optional parameter is the base offset of
3915 the structure. The name of the data type is defined as a symbol with
3916 the value of the base offset, and the name of the data type with the
3917 suffix \c{_size} appended to it is defined as an \c{EQU} giving the
3918 size of the structure. Once \c{STRUC} has been issued, you are
3919 defining the structure, and should define fields using the \c{RESB}
3920 family of pseudo-instructions, and then invoke \c{ENDSTRUC} to finish
3923 For example, to define a structure called \c{mytype} containing a
3924 longword, a word, a byte and a string of bytes, you might code
3935 The above code defines six symbols: \c{mt_long} as 0 (the offset
3936 from the beginning of a \c{mytype} structure to the longword field),
3937 \c{mt_word} as 4, \c{mt_byte} as 6, \c{mt_str} as 7, \c{mytype_size}
3938 as 39, and \c{mytype} itself as zero.
3940 The reason why the structure type name is defined at zero by default
3941 is a side effect of allowing structures to work with the local label
3942 mechanism: if your structure members tend to have the same names in
3943 more than one structure, you can define the above structure like this:
3954 This defines the offsets to the structure fields as \c{mytype.long},
3955 \c{mytype.word}, \c{mytype.byte} and \c{mytype.str}.
3957 NASM, since it has no \e{intrinsic} structure support, does not
3958 support any form of period notation to refer to the elements of a
3959 structure once you have one (except the above local-label notation),
3960 so code such as \c{mov ax,[mystruc.mt_word]} is not valid.
3961 \c{mt_word} is a constant just like any other constant, so the
3962 correct syntax is \c{mov ax,[mystruc+mt_word]} or \c{mov
3963 ax,[mystruc+mytype.word]}.
3965 Sometimes you only have the address of the structure displaced by an
3966 offset. For example, consider this standard stack frame setup:
3972 In this case, you could access an element by subtracting the offset:
3974 \c mov [ebp - 40 + mytype.word], ax
3976 However, if you do not want to repeat this offset, you can use -40 as
3979 \c struc mytype, -40
3981 And access an element this way:
3983 \c mov [ebp + mytype.word], ax
3986 \S{istruc} \i\c{ISTRUC}, \i\c{AT} and \i\c{IEND}: Declaring
3987 \i{Instances of Structures}
3989 Having defined a structure type, the next thing you typically want
3990 to do is to declare instances of that structure in your data
3991 segment. NASM provides an easy way to do this in the \c{ISTRUC}
3992 mechanism. To declare a structure of type \c{mytype} in a program,
3993 you code something like this:
3998 \c at mt_long, dd 123456
3999 \c at mt_word, dw 1024
4000 \c at mt_byte, db 'x'
4001 \c at mt_str, db 'hello, world', 13, 10, 0
4005 The function of the \c{AT} macro is to make use of the \c{TIMES}
4006 prefix to advance the assembly position to the correct point for the
4007 specified structure field, and then to declare the specified data.
4008 Therefore the structure fields must be declared in the same order as
4009 they were specified in the structure definition.
4011 If the data to go in a structure field requires more than one source
4012 line to specify, the remaining source lines can easily come after
4013 the \c{AT} line. For example:
4015 \c at mt_str, db 123,134,145,156,167,178,189
4018 Depending on personal taste, you can also omit the code part of the
4019 \c{AT} line completely, and start the structure field on the next
4023 \c db 'hello, world'
4027 \S{align} \i\c{ALIGN} and \i\c{ALIGNB}: Data Alignment
4029 The \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} macros provides a convenient way to
4030 align code or data on a word, longword, paragraph or other boundary.
4031 (Some assemblers call this directive \i\c{EVEN}.) The syntax of the
4032 \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} macros is
4034 \c align 4 ; align on 4-byte boundary
4035 \c align 16 ; align on 16-byte boundary
4036 \c align 8,db 0 ; pad with 0s rather than NOPs
4037 \c align 4,resb 1 ; align to 4 in the BSS
4038 \c alignb 4 ; equivalent to previous line
4040 Both macros require their first argument to be a power of two; they
4041 both compute the number of additional bytes required to bring the
4042 length of the current section up to a multiple of that power of two,
4043 and then apply the \c{TIMES} prefix to their second argument to
4044 perform the alignment.
4046 If the second argument is not specified, the default for \c{ALIGN}
4047 is \c{NOP}, and the default for \c{ALIGNB} is \c{RESB 1}. So if the
4048 second argument is specified, the two macros are equivalent.
4049 Normally, you can just use \c{ALIGN} in code and data sections and
4050 \c{ALIGNB} in BSS sections, and never need the second argument
4051 except for special purposes.
4053 \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB}, being simple macros, perform no error
4054 checking: they cannot warn you if their first argument fails to be a
4055 power of two, or if their second argument generates more than one
4056 byte of code. In each of these cases they will silently do the wrong
4059 \c{ALIGNB} (or \c{ALIGN} with a second argument of \c{RESB 1}) can
4060 be used within structure definitions:
4077 This will ensure that the structure members are sensibly aligned
4078 relative to the base of the structure.
4080 A final caveat: \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} work relative to the
4081 beginning of the \e{section}, not the beginning of the address space
4082 in the final executable. Aligning to a 16-byte boundary when the
4083 section you're in is only guaranteed to be aligned to a 4-byte
4084 boundary, for example, is a waste of effort. Again, NASM does not
4085 check that the section's alignment characteristics are sensible for
4086 the use of \c{ALIGN} or \c{ALIGNB}.
4088 See also the \c{smartalign} standard macro package, \k{pkg_smartalign}.
4091 \C{macropkg} \i{Standard Macro Packages}
4093 The \i\c{%use} directive (see \k{use}) includes one of the standard
4094 macro packages included with the NASM distribution and compiled into
4095 the NASM binary. It operates like the \c{%include} directive (see
4096 \k{include}), but the included contents is provided by NASM itself.
4098 The names of standard macro packages are case insensitive, and can be
4102 \H{pkg_altreg} \i\c{altreg}: \i{Alternate Register Names}
4104 The \c{altreg} standard macro package provides alternate register
4105 names. It provides numeric register names for all registers (not just
4106 \c{R8}-\c{R15}), the Intel-defined aliases \c{R8L}-\c{R15L} for the
4107 low bytes of register (as opposed to the NASM/AMD standard names
4108 \c{R8B}-\c{R15B}), and the names \c{R0H}-\c{R3H} (by analogy with
4109 \c{R0L}-\c{R3L}) for \c{AH}, \c{CH}, \c{DH}, and \c{BH}.
4116 \c mov r0l,r3h ; mov al,bh
4122 \H{pkg_smartalign} \i\c{smartalign}\I{align, smart}: Smart \c{ALIGN} Macro
4124 The \c{smartalign} standard macro package provides for an \i\c{ALIGN}
4125 macro which is more powerful than the default (and
4126 backwards-compatible) one (see \k{align}). When the \c{smartalign}
4127 package is enabled, when \c{ALIGN} is used without a second argument,
4128 NASM will generate a sequence of instructions more efficient than a
4129 series of \c{NOP}. Furthermore, if the padding exceeds a specific
4130 threshold, then NASM will generate a jump over the entire padding
4133 The specific instructions generated can be controlled with the
4134 new \i\c{ALIGNMODE} macro. This macro takes two parameters: one mode,
4135 and an optional jump threshold override. If (for any reason) you need
4136 to turn off the jump completely just set jump threshold value to -1
4137 (or set it to \c{nojmp}). The following modes are possible:
4139 \b \c{generic}: Works on all x86 CPUs and should have reasonable
4140 performance. The default jump threshold is 8. This is the
4143 \b \c{nop}: Pad out with \c{NOP} instructions. The only difference
4144 compared to the standard \c{ALIGN} macro is that NASM can still jump
4145 over a large padding area. The default jump threshold is 16.
4147 \b \c{k7}: Optimize for the AMD K7 (Athlon/Althon XP). These
4148 instructions should still work on all x86 CPUs. The default jump
4151 \b \c{k8}: Optimize for the AMD K8 (Opteron/Althon 64). These
4152 instructions should still work on all x86 CPUs. The default jump
4155 \b \c{p6}: Optimize for Intel CPUs. This uses the long \c{NOP}
4156 instructions first introduced in Pentium Pro. This is incompatible
4157 with all CPUs of family 5 or lower, as well as some VIA CPUs and
4158 several virtualization solutions. The default jump threshold is 16.
4160 The macro \i\c{__ALIGNMODE__} is defined to contain the current
4161 alignment mode. A number of other macros beginning with \c{__ALIGN_}
4162 are used internally by this macro package.
4165 \C{directive} \i{Assembler Directives}
4167 NASM, though it attempts to avoid the bureaucracy of assemblers like
4168 MASM and TASM, is nevertheless forced to support a \e{few}
4169 directives. These are described in this chapter.
4171 NASM's directives come in two types: \I{user-level
4172 directives}\e{user-level} directives and \I{primitive
4173 directives}\e{primitive} directives. Typically, each directive has a
4174 user-level form and a primitive form. In almost all cases, we
4175 recommend that users use the user-level forms of the directives,
4176 which are implemented as macros which call the primitive forms.
4178 Primitive directives are enclosed in square brackets; user-level
4181 In addition to the universal directives described in this chapter,
4182 each object file format can optionally supply extra directives in
4183 order to control particular features of that file format. These
4184 \I{format-specific directives}\e{format-specific} directives are
4185 documented along with the formats that implement them, in \k{outfmt}.
4188 \H{bits} \i\c{BITS}: Specifying Target \i{Processor Mode}
4190 The \c{BITS} directive specifies whether NASM should generate code
4191 \I{16-bit mode, versus 32-bit mode}designed to run on a processor
4192 operating in 16-bit mode, 32-bit mode or 64-bit mode. The syntax is
4193 \c{BITS XX}, where XX is 16, 32 or 64.
4195 In most cases, you should not need to use \c{BITS} explicitly. The
4196 \c{aout}, \c{coff}, \c{elf}, \c{macho}, \c{win32} and \c{win64}
4197 object formats, which are designed for use in 32-bit or 64-bit
4198 operating systems, all cause NASM to select 32-bit or 64-bit mode,
4199 respectively, by default. The \c{obj} object format allows you
4200 to specify each segment you define as either \c{USE16} or \c{USE32},
4201 and NASM will set its operating mode accordingly, so the use of the
4202 \c{BITS} directive is once again unnecessary.
4204 The most likely reason for using the \c{BITS} directive is to write
4205 32-bit or 64-bit code in a flat binary file; this is because the \c{bin}
4206 output format defaults to 16-bit mode in anticipation of it being
4207 used most frequently to write DOS \c{.COM} programs, DOS \c{.SYS}
4208 device drivers and boot loader software.
4210 You do \e{not} need to specify \c{BITS 32} merely in order to use
4211 32-bit instructions in a 16-bit DOS program; if you do, the
4212 assembler will generate incorrect code because it will be writing
4213 code targeted at a 32-bit platform, to be run on a 16-bit one.
4215 When NASM is in \c{BITS 16} mode, instructions which use 32-bit
4216 data are prefixed with an 0x66 byte, and those referring to 32-bit
4217 addresses have an 0x67 prefix. In \c{BITS 32} mode, the reverse is
4218 true: 32-bit instructions require no prefixes, whereas instructions
4219 using 16-bit data need an 0x66 and those working on 16-bit addresses
4222 When NASM is in \c{BITS 64} mode, most instructions operate the same
4223 as they do for \c{BITS 32} mode. However, there are 8 more general and
4224 SSE registers, and 16-bit addressing is no longer supported.
4226 The default address size is 64 bits; 32-bit addressing can be selected
4227 with the 0x67 prefix. The default operand size is still 32 bits,
4228 however, and the 0x66 prefix selects 16-bit operand size. The \c{REX}
4229 prefix is used both to select 64-bit operand size, and to access the
4230 new registers. NASM automatically inserts REX prefixes when
4233 When the \c{REX} prefix is used, the processor does not know how to
4234 address the AH, BH, CH or DH (high 8-bit legacy) registers. Instead,
4235 it is possible to access the the low 8-bits of the SP, BP SI and DI
4236 registers as SPL, BPL, SIL and DIL, respectively; but only when the
4239 The \c{BITS} directive has an exactly equivalent primitive form,
4240 \c{[BITS 16]}, \c{[BITS 32]} and \c{[BITS 64]}. The user-level form is
4241 a macro which has no function other than to call the primitive form.
4243 Note that the space is neccessary, e.g. \c{BITS32} will \e{not} work!
4245 \S{USE16 & USE32} \i\c{USE16} & \i\c{USE32}: Aliases for BITS
4247 The `\c{USE16}' and `\c{USE32}' directives can be used in place of
4248 `\c{BITS 16}' and `\c{BITS 32}', for compatibility with other assemblers.
4251 \H{default} \i\c{DEFAULT}: Change the assembler defaults
4253 The \c{DEFAULT} directive changes the assembler defaults. Normally,
4254 NASM defaults to a mode where the programmer is expected to explicitly
4255 specify most features directly. However, this is occationally
4256 obnoxious, as the explicit form is pretty much the only one one wishes
4259 Currently, the only \c{DEFAULT} that is settable is whether or not
4260 registerless instructions in 64-bit mode are \c{RIP}-relative or not.
4261 By default, they are absolute unless overridden with the \i\c{REL}
4262 specifier (see \k{effaddr}). However, if \c{DEFAULT REL} is
4263 specified, \c{REL} is default, unless overridden with the \c{ABS}
4264 specifier, \e{except when used with an FS or GS segment override}.
4266 The special handling of \c{FS} and \c{GS} overrides are due to the
4267 fact that these registers are generally used as thread pointers or
4268 other special functions in 64-bit mode, and generating
4269 \c{RIP}-relative addresses would be extremely confusing.
4271 \c{DEFAULT REL} is disabled with \c{DEFAULT ABS}.
4273 \H{section} \i\c{SECTION} or \i\c{SEGMENT}: Changing and \i{Defining
4276 \I{changing sections}\I{switching between sections}The \c{SECTION}
4277 directive (\c{SEGMENT} is an exactly equivalent synonym) changes
4278 which section of the output file the code you write will be
4279 assembled into. In some object file formats, the number and names of
4280 sections are fixed; in others, the user may make up as many as they
4281 wish. Hence \c{SECTION} may sometimes give an error message, or may
4282 define a new section, if you try to switch to a section that does
4285 The Unix object formats, and the \c{bin} object format (but see
4286 \k{multisec}, all support
4287 the \i{standardized section names} \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}
4288 for the code, data and uninitialized-data sections. The \c{obj}
4289 format, by contrast, does not recognize these section names as being
4290 special, and indeed will strip off the leading period of any section
4294 \S{sectmac} The \i\c{__SECT__} Macro
4296 The \c{SECTION} directive is unusual in that its user-level form
4297 functions differently from its primitive form. The primitive form,
4298 \c{[SECTION xyz]}, simply switches the current target section to the
4299 one given. The user-level form, \c{SECTION xyz}, however, first
4300 defines the single-line macro \c{__SECT__} to be the primitive
4301 \c{[SECTION]} directive which it is about to issue, and then issues
4302 it. So the user-level directive
4306 expands to the two lines
4308 \c %define __SECT__ [SECTION .text]
4311 Users may find it useful to make use of this in their own macros.
4312 For example, the \c{writefile} macro defined in \k{mlmacgre} can be
4313 usefully rewritten in the following more sophisticated form:
4315 \c %macro writefile 2+
4325 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
4332 This form of the macro, once passed a string to output, first
4333 switches temporarily to the data section of the file, using the
4334 primitive form of the \c{SECTION} directive so as not to modify
4335 \c{__SECT__}. It then declares its string in the data section, and
4336 then invokes \c{__SECT__} to switch back to \e{whichever} section
4337 the user was previously working in. It thus avoids the need, in the
4338 previous version of the macro, to include a \c{JMP} instruction to
4339 jump over the data, and also does not fail if, in a complicated
4340 \c{OBJ} format module, the user could potentially be assembling the
4341 code in any of several separate code sections.
4344 \H{absolute} \i\c{ABSOLUTE}: Defining Absolute Labels
4346 The \c{ABSOLUTE} directive can be thought of as an alternative form
4347 of \c{SECTION}: it causes the subsequent code to be directed at no
4348 physical section, but at the hypothetical section starting at the
4349 given absolute address. The only instructions you can use in this
4350 mode are the \c{RESB} family.
4352 \c{ABSOLUTE} is used as follows:
4360 This example describes a section of the PC BIOS data area, at
4361 segment address 0x40: the above code defines \c{kbuf_chr} to be
4362 0x1A, \c{kbuf_free} to be 0x1C, and \c{kbuf} to be 0x1E.
4364 The user-level form of \c{ABSOLUTE}, like that of \c{SECTION},
4365 redefines the \i\c{__SECT__} macro when it is invoked.
4367 \i\c{STRUC} and \i\c{ENDSTRUC} are defined as macros which use
4368 \c{ABSOLUTE} (and also \c{__SECT__}).
4370 \c{ABSOLUTE} doesn't have to take an absolute constant as an
4371 argument: it can take an expression (actually, a \i{critical
4372 expression}: see \k{crit}) and it can be a value in a segment. For
4373 example, a TSR can re-use its setup code as run-time BSS like this:
4375 \c org 100h ; it's a .COM program
4377 \c jmp setup ; setup code comes last
4379 \c ; the resident part of the TSR goes here
4381 \c ; now write the code that installs the TSR here
4385 \c runtimevar1 resw 1
4386 \c runtimevar2 resd 20
4390 This defines some variables `on top of' the setup code, so that
4391 after the setup has finished running, the space it took up can be
4392 re-used as data storage for the running TSR. The symbol `tsr_end'
4393 can be used to calculate the total size of the part of the TSR that
4394 needs to be made resident.
4397 \H{extern} \i\c{EXTERN}: \i{Importing Symbols} from Other Modules
4399 \c{EXTERN} is similar to the MASM directive \c{EXTRN} and the C
4400 keyword \c{extern}: it is used to declare a symbol which is not
4401 defined anywhere in the module being assembled, but is assumed to be
4402 defined in some other module and needs to be referred to by this
4403 one. Not every object-file format can support external variables:
4404 the \c{bin} format cannot.
4406 The \c{EXTERN} directive takes as many arguments as you like. Each
4407 argument is the name of a symbol:
4410 \c extern _sscanf,_fscanf
4412 Some object-file formats provide extra features to the \c{EXTERN}
4413 directive. In all cases, the extra features are used by suffixing a
4414 colon to the symbol name followed by object-format specific text.
4415 For example, the \c{obj} format allows you to declare that the
4416 default segment base of an external should be the group \c{dgroup}
4417 by means of the directive
4419 \c extern _variable:wrt dgroup
4421 The primitive form of \c{EXTERN} differs from the user-level form
4422 only in that it can take only one argument at a time: the support
4423 for multiple arguments is implemented at the preprocessor level.
4425 You can declare the same variable as \c{EXTERN} more than once: NASM
4426 will quietly ignore the second and later redeclarations. You can't
4427 declare a variable as \c{EXTERN} as well as something else, though.
4430 \H{global} \i\c{GLOBAL}: \i{Exporting Symbols} to Other Modules
4432 \c{GLOBAL} is the other end of \c{EXTERN}: if one module declares a
4433 symbol as \c{EXTERN} and refers to it, then in order to prevent
4434 linker errors, some other module must actually \e{define} the
4435 symbol and declare it as \c{GLOBAL}. Some assemblers use the name
4436 \i\c{PUBLIC} for this purpose.
4438 The \c{GLOBAL} directive applying to a symbol must appear \e{before}
4439 the definition of the symbol.
4441 \c{GLOBAL} uses the same syntax as \c{EXTERN}, except that it must
4442 refer to symbols which \e{are} defined in the same module as the
4443 \c{GLOBAL} directive. For example:
4449 \c{GLOBAL}, like \c{EXTERN}, allows object formats to define private
4450 extensions by means of a colon. The \c{elf} object format, for
4451 example, lets you specify whether global data items are functions or
4454 \c global hashlookup:function, hashtable:data
4456 Like \c{EXTERN}, the primitive form of \c{GLOBAL} differs from the
4457 user-level form only in that it can take only one argument at a
4461 \H{common} \i\c{COMMON}: Defining Common Data Areas
4463 The \c{COMMON} directive is used to declare \i\e{common variables}.
4464 A common variable is much like a global variable declared in the
4465 uninitialized data section, so that
4469 is similar in function to
4476 The difference is that if more than one module defines the same
4477 common variable, then at link time those variables will be
4478 \e{merged}, and references to \c{intvar} in all modules will point
4479 at the same piece of memory.
4481 Like \c{GLOBAL} and \c{EXTERN}, \c{COMMON} supports object-format
4482 specific extensions. For example, the \c{obj} format allows common
4483 variables to be NEAR or FAR, and the \c{elf} format allows you to
4484 specify the alignment requirements of a common variable:
4486 \c common commvar 4:near ; works in OBJ
4487 \c common intarray 100:4 ; works in ELF: 4 byte aligned
4489 Once again, like \c{EXTERN} and \c{GLOBAL}, the primitive form of
4490 \c{COMMON} differs from the user-level form only in that it can take
4491 only one argument at a time.
4494 \H{CPU} \i\c{CPU}: Defining CPU Dependencies
4496 The \i\c{CPU} directive restricts assembly to those instructions which
4497 are available on the specified CPU.
4501 \b\c{CPU 8086} Assemble only 8086 instruction set
4503 \b\c{CPU 186} Assemble instructions up to the 80186 instruction set
4505 \b\c{CPU 286} Assemble instructions up to the 286 instruction set
4507 \b\c{CPU 386} Assemble instructions up to the 386 instruction set
4509 \b\c{CPU 486} 486 instruction set
4511 \b\c{CPU 586} Pentium instruction set
4513 \b\c{CPU PENTIUM} Same as 586
4515 \b\c{CPU 686} P6 instruction set
4517 \b\c{CPU PPRO} Same as 686
4519 \b\c{CPU P2} Same as 686
4521 \b\c{CPU P3} Pentium III (Katmai) instruction sets
4523 \b\c{CPU KATMAI} Same as P3
4525 \b\c{CPU P4} Pentium 4 (Willamette) instruction set
4527 \b\c{CPU WILLAMETTE} Same as P4
4529 \b\c{CPU PRESCOTT} Prescott instruction set
4531 \b\c{CPU X64} x86-64 (x64/AMD64/Intel 64) instruction set
4533 \b\c{CPU IA64} IA64 CPU (in x86 mode) instruction set
4535 All options are case insensitive. All instructions will be selected
4536 only if they apply to the selected CPU or lower. By default, all
4537 instructions are available.
4540 \H{FLOAT} \i\c{FLOAT}: Handling of \I{floating-point, constants}floating-point constants
4542 By default, floating-point constants are rounded to nearest, and IEEE
4543 denormals are supported. The following options can be set to alter
4546 \b\c{FLOAT DAZ} Flush denormals to zero
4548 \b\c{FLOAT NODAZ} Do not flush denormals to zero (default)
4550 \b\c{FLOAT NEAR} Round to nearest (default)
4552 \b\c{FLOAT UP} Round up (toward +Infinity)
4554 \b\c{FLOAT DOWN} Round down (toward -Infinity)
4556 \b\c{FLOAT ZERO} Round toward zero
4558 \b\c{FLOAT DEFAULT} Restore default settings
4560 The standard macros \i\c{__FLOAT_DAZ__}, \i\c{__FLOAT_ROUND__}, and
4561 \i\c{__FLOAT__} contain the current state, as long as the programmer
4562 has avoided the use of the brackeded primitive form, (\c{[FLOAT]}).
4564 \c{__FLOAT__} contains the full set of floating-point settings; this
4565 value can be saved away and invoked later to restore the setting.
4568 \C{outfmt} \i{Output Formats}
4570 NASM is a portable assembler, designed to be able to compile on any
4571 ANSI C-supporting platform and produce output to run on a variety of
4572 Intel x86 operating systems. For this reason, it has a large number
4573 of available output formats, selected using the \i\c{-f} option on
4574 the NASM \i{command line}. Each of these formats, along with its
4575 extensions to the base NASM syntax, is detailed in this chapter.
4577 As stated in \k{opt-o}, NASM chooses a \i{default name} for your
4578 output file based on the input file name and the chosen output
4579 format. This will be generated by removing the \i{extension}
4580 (\c{.asm}, \c{.s}, or whatever you like to use) from the input file
4581 name, and substituting an extension defined by the output format.
4582 The extensions are given with each format below.
4585 \H{binfmt} \i\c{bin}: \i{Flat-Form Binary}\I{pure binary} Output
4587 The \c{bin} format does not produce object files: it generates
4588 nothing in the output file except the code you wrote. Such `pure
4589 binary' files are used by \i{MS-DOS}: \i\c{.COM} executables and
4590 \i\c{.SYS} device drivers are pure binary files. Pure binary output
4591 is also useful for \i{operating system} and \i{boot loader}
4594 The \c{bin} format supports \i{multiple section names}. For details of
4595 how NASM handles sections in the \c{bin} format, see \k{multisec}.
4597 Using the \c{bin} format puts NASM by default into 16-bit mode (see
4598 \k{bits}). In order to use \c{bin} to write 32-bit or 64-bit code,
4599 such as an OS kernel, you need to explicitly issue the \I\c{BITS}\c{BITS 32}
4600 or \I\c{BITS}\c{BITS 64} directive.
4602 \c{bin} has no default output file name extension: instead, it
4603 leaves your file name as it is once the original extension has been
4604 removed. Thus, the default is for NASM to assemble \c{binprog.asm}
4605 into a binary file called \c{binprog}.
4608 \S{org} \i\c{ORG}: Binary File \i{Program Origin}
4610 The \c{bin} format provides an additional directive to the list
4611 given in \k{directive}: \c{ORG}. The function of the \c{ORG}
4612 directive is to specify the origin address which NASM will assume
4613 the program begins at when it is loaded into memory.
4615 For example, the following code will generate the longword
4622 Unlike the \c{ORG} directive provided by MASM-compatible assemblers,
4623 which allows you to jump around in the object file and overwrite
4624 code you have already generated, NASM's \c{ORG} does exactly what
4625 the directive says: \e{origin}. Its sole function is to specify one
4626 offset which is added to all internal address references within the
4627 section; it does not permit any of the trickery that MASM's version
4628 does. See \k{proborg} for further comments.
4631 \S{binseg} \c{bin} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
4632 Directive\I{SECTION, bin extensions to}
4634 The \c{bin} output format extends the \c{SECTION} (or \c{SEGMENT})
4635 directive to allow you to specify the alignment requirements of
4636 segments. This is done by appending the \i\c{ALIGN} qualifier to the
4637 end of the section-definition line. For example,
4639 \c section .data align=16
4641 switches to the section \c{.data} and also specifies that it must be
4642 aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
4644 The parameter to \c{ALIGN} specifies how many low bits of the
4645 section start address must be forced to zero. The alignment value
4646 given may be any power of two.\I{section alignment, in
4647 bin}\I{segment alignment, in bin}\I{alignment, in bin sections}
4650 \S{multisec} \i{Multisection}\I{bin, multisection} Support for the \c{bin} Format
4652 The \c{bin} format allows the use of multiple sections, of arbitrary names,
4653 besides the "known" \c{.text}, \c{.data}, and \c{.bss} names.
4655 \b Sections may be designated \i\c{progbits} or \i\c{nobits}. Default
4656 is \c{progbits} (except \c{.bss}, which defaults to \c{nobits},
4659 \b Sections can be aligned at a specified boundary following the previous
4660 section with \c{align=}, or at an arbitrary byte-granular position with
4663 \b Sections can be given a virtual start address, which will be used
4664 for the calculation of all memory references within that section
4667 \b Sections can be ordered using \i\c{follows=}\c{<section>} or
4668 \i\c{vfollows=}\c{<section>} as an alternative to specifying an explicit
4671 \b Arguments to \c{org}, \c{start}, \c{vstart}, and \c{align=} are
4672 critical expressions. See \k{crit}. E.g. \c{align=(1 << ALIGN_SHIFT)}
4673 - \c{ALIGN_SHIFT} must be defined before it is used here.
4675 \b Any code which comes before an explicit \c{SECTION} directive
4676 is directed by default into the \c{.text} section.
4678 \b If an \c{ORG} statement is not given, \c{ORG 0} is used
4681 \b The \c{.bss} section will be placed after the last \c{progbits}
4682 section, unless \c{start=}, \c{vstart=}, \c{follows=}, or \c{vfollows=}
4685 \b All sections are aligned on dword boundaries, unless a different
4686 alignment has been specified.
4688 \b Sections may not overlap.
4690 \b NASM creates the \c{section.<secname>.start} for each section,
4691 which may be used in your code.
4693 \S{map}\i{Map Files}
4695 Map files can be generated in \c{-f bin} format by means of the \c{[map]}
4696 option. Map types of \c{all} (default), \c{brief}, \c{sections}, \c{segments},
4697 or \c{symbols} may be specified. Output may be directed to \c{stdout}
4698 (default), \c{stderr}, or a specified file. E.g.
4699 \c{[map symbols myfile.map]}. No "user form" exists, the square
4700 brackets must be used.
4703 \H{ithfmt} \i\c{ith}: \i{Intel Hex} Output
4705 The \c{ith} file format produces Intel hex-format files. Just as the
4706 \c{bin} format, this is a flat memory image format with no support for
4707 relocation or linking. It is usually used with ROM programmers and
4710 All extensions supported by the \c{bin} file format is also supported by
4711 the \c{ith} file format.
4713 \c{ith} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.ith}.
4716 \H{srecfmt} \i\c{srec}: \i{Motorola S-Records} Output
4718 The \c{srec} file format produces Motorola S-records files. Just as the
4719 \c{bin} format, this is a flat memory image format with no support for
4720 relocation or linking. It is usually used with ROM programmers and
4723 All extensions supported by the \c{bin} file format is also supported by
4724 the \c{srec} file format.
4726 \c{srec} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.srec}.
4729 \H{objfmt} \i\c{obj}: \i{Microsoft OMF}\I{OMF} Object Files
4731 The \c{obj} file format (NASM calls it \c{obj} rather than \c{omf}
4732 for historical reasons) is the one produced by \i{MASM} and
4733 \i{TASM}, which is typically fed to 16-bit DOS linkers to produce
4734 \i\c{.EXE} files. It is also the format used by \i{OS/2}.
4736 \c{obj} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.obj}.
4738 \c{obj} is not exclusively a 16-bit format, though: NASM has full
4739 support for the 32-bit extensions to the format. In particular,
4740 32-bit \c{obj} format files are used by \i{Borland's Win32
4741 compilers}, instead of using Microsoft's newer \i\c{win32} object
4744 The \c{obj} format does not define any special segment names: you
4745 can call your segments anything you like. Typical names for segments
4746 in \c{obj} format files are \c{CODE}, \c{DATA} and \c{BSS}.
4748 If your source file contains code before specifying an explicit
4749 \c{SEGMENT} directive, then NASM will invent its own segment called
4750 \i\c{__NASMDEFSEG} for you.
4752 When you define a segment in an \c{obj} file, NASM defines the
4753 segment name as a symbol as well, so that you can access the segment
4754 address of the segment. So, for example:
4763 \c mov ax,data ; get segment address of data
4764 \c mov ds,ax ; and move it into DS
4765 \c inc word [dvar] ; now this reference will work
4768 The \c{obj} format also enables the use of the \i\c{SEG} and
4769 \i\c{WRT} operators, so that you can write code which does things
4774 \c mov ax,seg foo ; get preferred segment of foo
4776 \c mov ax,data ; a different segment
4778 \c mov ax,[ds:foo] ; this accesses `foo'
4779 \c mov [es:foo wrt data],bx ; so does this
4782 \S{objseg} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{SEGMENT}
4783 Directive\I{SEGMENT, obj extensions to}
4785 The \c{obj} output format extends the \c{SEGMENT} (or \c{SECTION})
4786 directive to allow you to specify various properties of the segment
4787 you are defining. This is done by appending extra qualifiers to the
4788 end of the segment-definition line. For example,
4790 \c segment code private align=16
4792 defines the segment \c{code}, but also declares it to be a private
4793 segment, and requires that the portion of it described in this code
4794 module must be aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
4796 The available qualifiers are:
4798 \b \i\c{PRIVATE}, \i\c{PUBLIC}, \i\c{COMMON} and \i\c{STACK} specify
4799 the combination characteristics of the segment. \c{PRIVATE} segments
4800 do not get combined with any others by the linker; \c{PUBLIC} and
4801 \c{STACK} segments get concatenated together at link time; and
4802 \c{COMMON} segments all get overlaid on top of each other rather
4803 than stuck end-to-end.
4805 \b \i\c{ALIGN} is used, as shown above, to specify how many low bits
4806 of the segment start address must be forced to zero. The alignment
4807 value given may be any power of two from 1 to 4096; in reality, the
4808 only values supported are 1, 2, 4, 16, 256 and 4096, so if 8 is
4809 specified it will be rounded up to 16, and 32, 64 and 128 will all
4810 be rounded up to 256, and so on. Note that alignment to 4096-byte
4811 boundaries is a \i{PharLap} extension to the format and may not be
4812 supported by all linkers.\I{section alignment, in OBJ}\I{segment
4813 alignment, in OBJ}\I{alignment, in OBJ sections}
4815 \b \i\c{CLASS} can be used to specify the segment class; this feature
4816 indicates to the linker that segments of the same class should be
4817 placed near each other in the output file. The class name can be any
4818 word, e.g. \c{CLASS=CODE}.
4820 \b \i\c{OVERLAY}, like \c{CLASS}, is specified with an arbitrary word
4821 as an argument, and provides overlay information to an
4822 overlay-capable linker.
4824 \b Segments can be declared as \i\c{USE16} or \i\c{USE32}, which has
4825 the effect of recording the choice in the object file and also
4826 ensuring that NASM's default assembly mode when assembling in that
4827 segment is 16-bit or 32-bit respectively.
4829 \b When writing \i{OS/2} object files, you should declare 32-bit
4830 segments as \i\c{FLAT}, which causes the default segment base for
4831 anything in the segment to be the special group \c{FLAT}, and also
4832 defines the group if it is not already defined.
4834 \b The \c{obj} file format also allows segments to be declared as
4835 having a pre-defined absolute segment address, although no linkers
4836 are currently known to make sensible use of this feature;
4837 nevertheless, NASM allows you to declare a segment such as
4838 \c{SEGMENT SCREEN ABSOLUTE=0xB800} if you need to. The \i\c{ABSOLUTE}
4839 and \c{ALIGN} keywords are mutually exclusive.
4841 NASM's default segment attributes are \c{PUBLIC}, \c{ALIGN=1}, no
4842 class, no overlay, and \c{USE16}.
4845 \S{group} \i\c{GROUP}: Defining Groups of Segments\I{segments, groups of}
4847 The \c{obj} format also allows segments to be grouped, so that a
4848 single segment register can be used to refer to all the segments in
4849 a group. NASM therefore supplies the \c{GROUP} directive, whereby
4858 \c ; some uninitialized data
4860 \c group dgroup data bss
4862 which will define a group called \c{dgroup} to contain the segments
4863 \c{data} and \c{bss}. Like \c{SEGMENT}, \c{GROUP} causes the group
4864 name to be defined as a symbol, so that you can refer to a variable
4865 \c{var} in the \c{data} segment as \c{var wrt data} or as \c{var wrt
4866 dgroup}, depending on which segment value is currently in your
4869 If you just refer to \c{var}, however, and \c{var} is declared in a
4870 segment which is part of a group, then NASM will default to giving
4871 you the offset of \c{var} from the beginning of the \e{group}, not
4872 the \e{segment}. Therefore \c{SEG var}, also, will return the group
4873 base rather than the segment base.
4875 NASM will allow a segment to be part of more than one group, but
4876 will generate a warning if you do this. Variables declared in a
4877 segment which is part of more than one group will default to being
4878 relative to the first group that was defined to contain the segment.
4880 A group does not have to contain any segments; you can still make
4881 \c{WRT} references to a group which does not contain the variable
4882 you are referring to. OS/2, for example, defines the special group
4883 \c{FLAT} with no segments in it.
4886 \S{uppercase} \i\c{UPPERCASE}: Disabling Case Sensitivity in Output
4888 Although NASM itself is \i{case sensitive}, some OMF linkers are
4889 not; therefore it can be useful for NASM to output single-case
4890 object files. The \c{UPPERCASE} format-specific directive causes all
4891 segment, group and symbol names that are written to the object file
4892 to be forced to upper case just before being written. Within a
4893 source file, NASM is still case-sensitive; but the object file can
4894 be written entirely in upper case if desired.
4896 \c{UPPERCASE} is used alone on a line; it requires no parameters.
4899 \S{import} \i\c{IMPORT}: Importing DLL Symbols\I{DLL symbols,
4900 importing}\I{symbols, importing from DLLs}
4902 The \c{IMPORT} format-specific directive defines a symbol to be
4903 imported from a DLL, for use if you are writing a DLL's \i{import
4904 library} in NASM. You still need to declare the symbol as \c{EXTERN}
4905 as well as using the \c{IMPORT} directive.
4907 The \c{IMPORT} directive takes two required parameters, separated by
4908 white space, which are (respectively) the name of the symbol you
4909 wish to import and the name of the library you wish to import it
4912 \c import WSAStartup wsock32.dll
4914 A third optional parameter gives the name by which the symbol is
4915 known in the library you are importing it from, in case this is not
4916 the same as the name you wish the symbol to be known by to your code
4917 once you have imported it. For example:
4919 \c import asyncsel wsock32.dll WSAAsyncSelect
4922 \S{export} \i\c{EXPORT}: Exporting DLL Symbols\I{DLL symbols,
4923 exporting}\I{symbols, exporting from DLLs}
4925 The \c{EXPORT} format-specific directive defines a global symbol to
4926 be exported as a DLL symbol, for use if you are writing a DLL in
4927 NASM. You still need to declare the symbol as \c{GLOBAL} as well as
4928 using the \c{EXPORT} directive.
4930 \c{EXPORT} takes one required parameter, which is the name of the
4931 symbol you wish to export, as it was defined in your source file. An
4932 optional second parameter (separated by white space from the first)
4933 gives the \e{external} name of the symbol: the name by which you
4934 wish the symbol to be known to programs using the DLL. If this name
4935 is the same as the internal name, you may leave the second parameter
4938 Further parameters can be given to define attributes of the exported
4939 symbol. These parameters, like the second, are separated by white
4940 space. If further parameters are given, the external name must also
4941 be specified, even if it is the same as the internal name. The
4942 available attributes are:
4944 \b \c{resident} indicates that the exported name is to be kept
4945 resident by the system loader. This is an optimisation for
4946 frequently used symbols imported by name.
4948 \b \c{nodata} indicates that the exported symbol is a function which
4949 does not make use of any initialized data.
4951 \b \c{parm=NNN}, where \c{NNN} is an integer, sets the number of
4952 parameter words for the case in which the symbol is a call gate
4953 between 32-bit and 16-bit segments.
4955 \b An attribute which is just a number indicates that the symbol
4956 should be exported with an identifying number (ordinal), and gives
4962 \c export myfunc TheRealMoreFormalLookingFunctionName
4963 \c export myfunc myfunc 1234 ; export by ordinal
4964 \c export myfunc myfunc resident parm=23 nodata
4967 \S{dotdotstart} \i\c{..start}: Defining the \i{Program Entry
4970 \c{OMF} linkers require exactly one of the object files being linked to
4971 define the program entry point, where execution will begin when the
4972 program is run. If the object file that defines the entry point is
4973 assembled using NASM, you specify the entry point by declaring the
4974 special symbol \c{..start} at the point where you wish execution to
4978 \S{objextern} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{EXTERN}
4979 Directive\I{EXTERN, obj extensions to}
4981 If you declare an external symbol with the directive
4985 then references such as \c{mov ax,foo} will give you the offset of
4986 \c{foo} from its preferred segment base (as specified in whichever
4987 module \c{foo} is actually defined in). So to access the contents of
4988 \c{foo} you will usually need to do something like
4990 \c mov ax,seg foo ; get preferred segment base
4991 \c mov es,ax ; move it into ES
4992 \c mov ax,[es:foo] ; and use offset `foo' from it
4994 This is a little unwieldy, particularly if you know that an external
4995 is going to be accessible from a given segment or group, say
4996 \c{dgroup}. So if \c{DS} already contained \c{dgroup}, you could
4999 \c mov ax,[foo wrt dgroup]
5001 However, having to type this every time you want to access \c{foo}
5002 can be a pain; so NASM allows you to declare \c{foo} in the
5005 \c extern foo:wrt dgroup
5007 This form causes NASM to pretend that the preferred segment base of
5008 \c{foo} is in fact \c{dgroup}; so the expression \c{seg foo} will
5009 now return \c{dgroup}, and the expression \c{foo} is equivalent to
5012 This \I{default-WRT mechanism}default-\c{WRT} mechanism can be used
5013 to make externals appear to be relative to any group or segment in
5014 your program. It can also be applied to common variables: see
5018 \S{objcommon} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{COMMON}
5019 Directive\I{COMMON, obj extensions to}
5021 The \c{obj} format allows common variables to be either near\I{near
5022 common variables} or far\I{far common variables}; NASM allows you to
5023 specify which your variables should be by the use of the syntax
5025 \c common nearvar 2:near ; `nearvar' is a near common
5026 \c common farvar 10:far ; and `farvar' is far
5028 Far common variables may be greater in size than 64Kb, and so the
5029 OMF specification says that they are declared as a number of
5030 \e{elements} of a given size. So a 10-byte far common variable could
5031 be declared as ten one-byte elements, five two-byte elements, two
5032 five-byte elements or one ten-byte element.
5034 Some \c{OMF} linkers require the \I{element size, in common
5035 variables}\I{common variables, element size}element size, as well as
5036 the variable size, to match when resolving common variables declared
5037 in more than one module. Therefore NASM must allow you to specify
5038 the element size on your far common variables. This is done by the
5041 \c common c_5by2 10:far 5 ; two five-byte elements
5042 \c common c_2by5 10:far 2 ; five two-byte elements
5044 If no element size is specified, the default is 1. Also, the \c{FAR}
5045 keyword is not required when an element size is specified, since
5046 only far commons may have element sizes at all. So the above
5047 declarations could equivalently be
5049 \c common c_5by2 10:5 ; two five-byte elements
5050 \c common c_2by5 10:2 ; five two-byte elements
5052 In addition to these extensions, the \c{COMMON} directive in \c{obj}
5053 also supports default-\c{WRT} specification like \c{EXTERN} does
5054 (explained in \k{objextern}). So you can also declare things like
5056 \c common foo 10:wrt dgroup
5057 \c common bar 16:far 2:wrt data
5058 \c common baz 24:wrt data:6
5061 \H{win32fmt} \i\c{win32}: Microsoft Win32 Object Files
5063 The \c{win32} output format generates Microsoft Win32 object files,
5064 suitable for passing to Microsoft linkers such as \i{Visual C++}.
5065 Note that Borland Win32 compilers do not use this format, but use
5066 \c{obj} instead (see \k{objfmt}).
5068 \c{win32} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.obj}.
5070 Note that although Microsoft say that Win32 object files follow the
5071 \c{COFF} (Common Object File Format) standard, the object files produced
5072 by Microsoft Win32 compilers are not compatible with COFF linkers
5073 such as DJGPP's, and vice versa. This is due to a difference of
5074 opinion over the precise semantics of PC-relative relocations. To
5075 produce COFF files suitable for DJGPP, use NASM's \c{coff} output
5076 format; conversely, the \c{coff} format does not produce object
5077 files that Win32 linkers can generate correct output from.
5080 \S{win32sect} \c{win32} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5081 Directive\I{SECTION, win32 extensions to}
5083 Like the \c{obj} format, \c{win32} allows you to specify additional
5084 information on the \c{SECTION} directive line, to control the type
5085 and properties of sections you declare. Section types and properties
5086 are generated automatically by NASM for the \i{standard section names}
5087 \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}, but may still be overridden by
5090 The available qualifiers are:
5092 \b \c{code}, or equivalently \c{text}, defines the section to be a
5093 code section. This marks the section as readable and executable, but
5094 not writable, and also indicates to the linker that the type of the
5097 \b \c{data} and \c{bss} define the section to be a data section,
5098 analogously to \c{code}. Data sections are marked as readable and
5099 writable, but not executable. \c{data} declares an initialized data
5100 section, whereas \c{bss} declares an uninitialized data section.
5102 \b \c{rdata} declares an initialized data section that is readable
5103 but not writable. Microsoft compilers use this section to place
5106 \b \c{info} defines the section to be an \i{informational section},
5107 which is not included in the executable file by the linker, but may
5108 (for example) pass information \e{to} the linker. For example,
5109 declaring an \c{info}-type section called \i\c{.drectve} causes the
5110 linker to interpret the contents of the section as command-line
5113 \b \c{align=}, used with a trailing number as in \c{obj}, gives the
5114 \I{section alignment, in win32}\I{alignment, in win32
5115 sections}alignment requirements of the section. The maximum you may
5116 specify is 64: the Win32 object file format contains no means to
5117 request a greater section alignment than this. If alignment is not
5118 explicitly specified, the defaults are 16-byte alignment for code
5119 sections, 8-byte alignment for rdata sections and 4-byte alignment
5120 for data (and BSS) sections.
5121 Informational sections get a default alignment of 1 byte (no
5122 alignment), though the value does not matter.
5124 The defaults assumed by NASM if you do not specify the above
5127 \c section .text code align=16
5128 \c section .data data align=4
5129 \c section .rdata rdata align=8
5130 \c section .bss bss align=4
5132 Any other section name is treated by default like \c{.text}.
5134 \S{win32safeseh} \c{win32}: Safe Structured Exception Handling
5136 Among other improvements in Windows XP SP2 and Windows Server 2003
5137 Microsoft has introduced concept of "safe structured exception
5138 handling." General idea is to collect handlers' entry points in
5139 designated read-only table and have alleged entry point verified
5140 against this table prior exception control is passed to the handler. In
5141 order for an executable module to be equipped with such "safe exception
5142 handler table," all object modules on linker command line has to comply
5143 with certain criteria. If one single module among them does not, then
5144 the table in question is omitted and above mentioned run-time checks
5145 will not be performed for application in question. Table omission is by
5146 default silent and therefore can be easily overlooked. One can instruct
5147 linker to refuse to produce binary without such table by passing
5148 \c{/safeseh} command line option.
5150 Without regard to this run-time check merits it's natural to expect
5151 NASM to be capable of generating modules suitable for \c{/safeseh}
5152 linking. From developer's viewpoint the problem is two-fold:
5154 \b how to adapt modules not deploying exception handlers of their own;
5156 \b how to adapt/develop modules utilizing custom exception handling;
5158 Former can be easily achieved with any NASM version by adding following
5159 line to source code:
5163 As of version 2.03 NASM adds this absolute symbol automatically. If
5164 it's not already present to be precise. I.e. if for whatever reason
5165 developer would choose to assign another value in source file, it would
5166 still be perfectly possible.
5168 Registering custom exception handler on the other hand requires certain
5169 "magic." As of version 2.03 additional directive is implemented,
5170 \c{safeseh}, which instructs the assembler to produce appropriately
5171 formatted input data for above mentioned "safe exception handler
5172 table." Its typical use would be:
5175 \c extern _MessageBoxA@16
5176 \c %if __NASM_VERSION_ID__ >= 0x02030000
5177 \c safeseh handler ; register handler as "safe handler"
5180 \c push DWORD 1 ; MB_OKCANCEL
5181 \c push DWORD caption
5184 \c call _MessageBoxA@16
5185 \c sub eax,1 ; incidentally suits as return value
5186 \c ; for exception handler
5190 \c push DWORD handler
5191 \c push DWORD [fs:0]
5192 \c mov DWORD [fs:0],esp ; engage exception handler
5194 \c mov eax,DWORD[eax] ; cause exception
5195 \c pop DWORD [fs:0] ; disengage exception handler
5198 \c text: db 'OK to rethrow, CANCEL to generate core dump',0
5199 \c caption:db 'SEGV',0
5201 \c section .drectve info
5202 \c db '/defaultlib:user32.lib /defaultlib:msvcrt.lib '
5204 As you might imagine, it's perfectly possible to produce .exe binary
5205 with "safe exception handler table" and yet engage unregistered
5206 exception handler. Indeed, handler is engaged by simply manipulating
5207 \c{[fs:0]} location at run-time, something linker has no power over,
5208 run-time that is. It should be explicitly mentioned that such failure
5209 to register handler's entry point with \c{safeseh} directive has
5210 undesired side effect at run-time. If exception is raised and
5211 unregistered handler is to be executed, the application is abruptly
5212 terminated without any notification whatsoever. One can argue that
5213 system could at least have logged some kind "non-safe exception
5214 handler in x.exe at address n" message in event log, but no, literally
5215 no notification is provided and user is left with no clue on what
5216 caused application failure.
5218 Finally, all mentions of linker in this paragraph refer to Microsoft
5219 linker version 7.x and later. Presence of \c{@feat.00} symbol and input
5220 data for "safe exception handler table" causes no backward
5221 incompatibilities and "safeseh" modules generated by NASM 2.03 and
5222 later can still be linked by earlier versions or non-Microsoft linkers.
5225 \H{win64fmt} \i\c{win64}: Microsoft Win64 Object Files
5227 The \c{win64} output format generates Microsoft Win64 object files,
5228 which is nearly 100% identical to the \c{win32} object format (\k{win32fmt})
5229 with the exception that it is meant to target 64-bit code and the x86-64
5230 platform altogether. This object file is used exactly the same as the \c{win32}
5231 object format (\k{win32fmt}), in NASM, with regard to this exception.
5233 \S{win64pic} \c{win64}: Writing Position-Independent Code
5235 While \c{REL} takes good care of RIP-relative addressing, there is one
5236 aspect that is easy to overlook for a Win64 programmer: indirect
5237 references. Consider a switch dispatch table:
5239 \c jmp QWORD[dsptch+rax*8]
5245 Even novice Win64 assembler programmer will soon realize that the code
5246 is not 64-bit savvy. Most notably linker will refuse to link it with
5247 "\c{'ADDR32' relocation to '.text' invalid without
5248 /LARGEADDRESSAWARE:NO}". So [s]he will have to split jmp instruction as
5251 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5252 \c jmp QWORD[rbx+rax*8]
5254 What happens behind the scene is that effective address in \c{lea} is
5255 encoded relative to instruction pointer, or in perfectly
5256 position-independent manner. But this is only part of the problem!
5257 Trouble is that in .dll context \c{caseN} relocations will make their
5258 way to the final module and might have to be adjusted at .dll load
5259 time. To be specific when it can't be loaded at preferred address. And
5260 when this occurs, pages with such relocations will be rendered private
5261 to current process, which kind of undermines the idea of sharing .dll.
5262 But no worry, it's trivial to fix:
5264 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5265 \c add rbx,QWORD[rbx+rax*8]
5268 \c dsptch: dq case0-dsptch
5272 NASM version 2.03 and later provides another alternative, \c{wrt
5273 ..imagebase} operator, which returns offset from base address of the
5274 current image, be it .exe or .dll module, therefore the name. For those
5275 acquainted with PE-COFF format base address denotes start of
5276 \c{IMAGE_DOS_HEADER} structure. Here is how to implement switch with
5277 these image-relative references:
5279 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5280 \c mov eax,DWORD[rbx+rax*4]
5281 \c sub rbx,dsptch wrt ..imagebase
5285 \c dsptch: dd case0 wrt ..imagebase
5286 \c dd case1 wrt ..imagebase
5288 One can argue that the operator is redundant. Indeed, snippet before
5289 last works just fine with any NASM version and is not even Windows
5290 specific... The real reason for implementing \c{wrt ..imagebase} will
5291 become apparent in next paragraph.
5293 It should be noted that \c{wrt ..imagebase} is defined as 32-bit
5296 \c dd label wrt ..imagebase ; ok
5297 \c dq label wrt ..imagebase ; bad
5298 \c mov eax,label wrt ..imagebase ; ok
5299 \c mov rax,label wrt ..imagebase ; bad
5301 \S{win64seh} \c{win64}: Structured Exception Handling
5303 Structured exception handing in Win64 is completely different matter
5304 from Win32. Upon exception program counter value is noted, and
5305 linker-generated table comprising start and end addresses of all the
5306 functions [in given executable module] is traversed and compared to the
5307 saved program counter. Thus so called \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5308 identified. If it's not found, then offending subroutine is assumed to
5309 be "leaf" and just mentioned lookup procedure is attempted for its
5310 caller. In Win64 leaf function is such function that does not call any
5311 other function \e{nor} modifies any Win64 non-volatile registers,
5312 including stack pointer. The latter ensures that it's possible to
5313 identify leaf function's caller by simply pulling the value from the
5316 While majority of subroutines written in assembler are not calling any
5317 other function, requirement for non-volatile registers' immutability
5318 leaves developer with not more than 7 registers and no stack frame,
5319 which is not necessarily what [s]he counted with. Customarily one would
5320 meet the requirement by saving non-volatile registers on stack and
5321 restoring them upon return, so what can go wrong? If [and only if] an
5322 exception is raised at run-time and no \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5323 associated with such "leaf" function, the stack unwind procedure will
5324 expect to find caller's return address on the top of stack immediately
5325 followed by its frame. Given that developer pushed caller's
5326 non-volatile registers on stack, would the value on top point at some
5327 code segment or even addressable space? Well, developer can attempt
5328 copying caller's return address to the top of stack and this would
5329 actually work in some very specific circumstances. But unless developer
5330 can guarantee that these circumstances are always met, it's more
5331 appropriate to assume worst case scenario, i.e. stack unwind procedure
5332 going berserk. Relevant question is what happens then? Application is
5333 abruptly terminated without any notification whatsoever. Just like in
5334 Win32 case, one can argue that system could at least have logged
5335 "unwind procedure went berserk in x.exe at address n" in event log, but
5336 no, no trace of failure is left.
5338 Now, when we understand significance of the \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure,
5339 let's discuss what's in it and/or how it's processed. First of all it
5340 is checked for presence of reference to custom language-specific
5341 exception handler. If there is one, then it's invoked. Depending on the
5342 return value, execution flow is resumed (exception is said to be
5343 "handled"), \e{or} rest of \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is processed as
5344 following. Beside optional reference to custom handler, it carries
5345 information about current callee's stack frame and where non-volatile
5346 registers are saved. Information is detailed enough to be able to
5347 reconstruct contents of caller's non-volatile registers upon call to
5348 current callee. And so caller's context is reconstructed, and then
5349 unwind procedure is repeated, i.e. another \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5350 associated, this time, with caller's instruction pointer, which is then
5351 checked for presence of reference to language-specific handler, etc.
5352 The procedure is recursively repeated till exception is handled. As
5353 last resort system "handles" it by generating memory core dump and
5354 terminating the application.
5356 As for the moment of this writing NASM unfortunately does not
5357 facilitate generation of above mentioned detailed information about
5358 stack frame layout. But as of version 2.03 it implements building
5359 blocks for generating structures involved in stack unwinding. As
5360 simplest example, here is how to deploy custom exception handler for
5365 \c extern MessageBoxA
5371 \c mov r9,1 ; MB_OKCANCEL
5373 \c sub eax,1 ; incidentally suits as return value
5374 \c ; for exception handler
5380 \c mov rax,QWORD[rax] ; cause exception
5383 \c text: db 'OK to rethrow, CANCEL to generate core dump',0
5384 \c caption:db 'SEGV',0
5386 \c section .pdata rdata align=4
5387 \c dd main wrt ..imagebase
5388 \c dd main_end wrt ..imagebase
5389 \c dd xmain wrt ..imagebase
5390 \c section .xdata rdata align=8
5391 \c xmain: db 9,0,0,0
5392 \c dd handler wrt ..imagebase
5393 \c section .drectve info
5394 \c db '/defaultlib:user32.lib /defaultlib:msvcrt.lib '
5396 What you see in \c{.pdata} section is element of the "table comprising
5397 start and end addresses of function" along with reference to associated
5398 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure. And what you see in \c{.xdata} section is
5399 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure describing function with no frame, but with
5400 designated exception handler. References are \e{required} to be
5401 image-relative (which is the real reason for implementing \c{wrt
5402 ..imagebase} operator). It should be noted that \c{rdata align=n}, as
5403 well as \c{wrt ..imagebase}, are optional in these two segments'
5404 contexts, i.e. can be omitted. Latter means that \e{all} 32-bit
5405 references, not only above listed required ones, placed into these two
5406 segments turn out image-relative. Why is it important to understand?
5407 Developer is allowed to append handler-specific data to \c{UNWIND_INFO}
5408 structure, and if [s]he adds a 32-bit reference, then [s]he will have
5409 to remember to adjust its value to obtain the real pointer.
5411 As already mentioned, in Win64 terms leaf function is one that does not
5412 call any other function \e{nor} modifies any non-volatile register,
5413 including stack pointer. But it's not uncommon that assembler
5414 programmer plans to utilize every single register and sometimes even
5415 have variable stack frame. Is there anything one can do with bare
5416 building blocks? I.e. besides manually composing fully-fledged
5417 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure, which would surely be considered
5418 error-prone? Yes, there is. Recall that exception handler is called
5419 first, before stack layout is analyzed. As it turned out, it's
5420 perfectly possible to manipulate current callee's context in custom
5421 handler in manner that permits further stack unwinding. General idea is
5422 that handler would not actually "handle" the exception, but instead
5423 restore callee's context, as it was at its entry point and thus mimic
5424 leaf function. In other words, handler would simply undertake part of
5425 unwinding procedure. Consider following example:
5428 \c mov rax,rsp ; copy rsp to volatile register
5429 \c push r15 ; save non-volatile registers
5432 \c mov r11,rsp ; prepare variable stack frame
5435 \c mov QWORD[r11],rax ; check for exceptions
5436 \c mov rsp,r11 ; allocate stack frame
5437 \c mov QWORD[rsp],rax ; save original rsp value
5440 \c mov r11,QWORD[rsp] ; pull original rsp value
5441 \c mov rbp,QWORD[r11-24]
5442 \c mov rbx,QWORD[r11-16]
5443 \c mov r15,QWORD[r11-8]
5444 \c mov rsp,r11 ; destroy frame
5447 The keyword is that up to \c{magic_point} original \c{rsp} value
5448 remains in chosen volatile register and no non-volatile register,
5449 except for \c{rsp}, is modified. While past \c{magic_point} \c{rsp}
5450 remains constant till the very end of the \c{function}. In this case
5451 custom language-specific exception handler would look like this:
5453 \c EXCEPTION_DISPOSITION handler (EXCEPTION_RECORD *rec,ULONG64 frame,
5454 \c CONTEXT *context,DISPATCHER_CONTEXT *disp)
5456 \c if (context->Rip<(ULONG64)magic_point)
5457 \c rsp = (ULONG64 *)context->Rax;
5459 \c { rsp = ((ULONG64 **)context->Rsp)[0];
5460 \c context->Rbp = rsp[-3];
5461 \c context->Rbx = rsp[-2];
5462 \c context->R15 = rsp[-1];
5464 \c context->Rsp = (ULONG64)rsp;
5466 \c memcpy (disp->ContextRecord,context,sizeof(CONTEXT));
5467 \c RtlVirtualUnwind(UNW_FLAG_NHANDLER,disp->ImageBase,
5468 \c dips->ControlPc,disp->FunctionEntry,disp->ContextRecord,
5469 \c &disp->HandlerData,&disp->EstablisherFrame,NULL);
5470 \c return ExceptionContinueSearch;
5473 As custom handler mimics leaf function, corresponding \c{UNWIND_INFO}
5474 structure does not have to contain any information about stack frame
5477 \H{cofffmt} \i\c{coff}: \i{Common Object File Format}
5479 The \c{coff} output type produces \c{COFF} object files suitable for
5480 linking with the \i{DJGPP} linker.
5482 \c{coff} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5484 The \c{coff} format supports the same extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5485 directive as \c{win32} does, except that the \c{align} qualifier and
5486 the \c{info} section type are not supported.
5488 \H{machofmt} \I{Mach-O}\i\c{macho32} and \i\c{macho64}: \i{Mach Object File Format}
5490 The \c{macho32} and \c{macho64} output formts produces \c{Mach-O}
5491 object files suitable for linking with the \i{MacOS X} linker.
5492 \i\c{macho} is a synonym for \c{macho32}.
5494 \c{macho} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5496 \H{elffmt} \i\c{elf32} and \i\c{elf64}: \I{ELF}\I{linux, elf}\i{Executable and Linkable
5497 Format} Object Files
5499 The \c{elf32} and \c{elf64} output formats generate \c{ELF32 and ELF64} (Executable and Linkable Format) object files, as used by Linux as well as \i{Unix System V},
5500 including \i{Solaris x86}, \i{UnixWare} and \i{SCO Unix}. \c{elf}
5501 provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5502 \c{elf} is a synonym for \c{elf32}.
5504 \S{abisect} ELF specific directive \i\c{osabi}
5506 The ELF header specifies the application binary interface for the target operating system (OSABI).
5507 This field can be set by using the \c{osabi} directive with the numeric value (0-255) of the target
5508 system. If this directive is not used, the default value will be "UNIX System V ABI" (0) which will work on
5509 most systems which support ELF.
5511 \S{elfsect} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5512 Directive\I{SECTION, elf extensions to}
5514 Like the \c{obj} format, \c{elf} allows you to specify additional
5515 information on the \c{SECTION} directive line, to control the type
5516 and properties of sections you declare. Section types and properties
5517 are generated automatically by NASM for the \i{standard section
5518 names}, but may still be
5519 overridden by these qualifiers.
5521 The available qualifiers are:
5523 \b \i\c{alloc} defines the section to be one which is loaded into
5524 memory when the program is run. \i\c{noalloc} defines it to be one
5525 which is not, such as an informational or comment section.
5527 \b \i\c{exec} defines the section to be one which should have execute
5528 permission when the program is run. \i\c{noexec} defines it as one
5531 \b \i\c{write} defines the section to be one which should be writable
5532 when the program is run. \i\c{nowrite} defines it as one which should
5535 \b \i\c{progbits} defines the section to be one with explicit contents
5536 stored in the object file: an ordinary code or data section, for
5537 example, \i\c{nobits} defines the section to be one with no explicit
5538 contents given, such as a BSS section.
5540 \b \c{align=}, used with a trailing number as in \c{obj}, gives the
5541 \I{section alignment, in elf}\I{alignment, in elf sections}alignment
5542 requirements of the section.
5544 \b \i\c{tls} defines the section to be one which contains
5545 thread local variables.
5547 The defaults assumed by NASM if you do not specify the above
5550 \I\c{.text} \I\c{.rodata} \I\c{.lrodata} \I\c{.data} \I\c{.ldata}
5551 \I\c{.bss} \I\c{.lbss} \I\c{.tdata} \I\c{.tbss} \I\c\{.comment}
5553 \c section .text progbits alloc exec nowrite align=16
5554 \c section .rodata progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=4
5555 \c section .lrodata progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=4
5556 \c section .data progbits alloc noexec write align=4
5557 \c section .ldata progbits alloc noexec write align=4
5558 \c section .bss nobits alloc noexec write align=4
5559 \c section .lbss nobits alloc noexec write align=4
5560 \c section .tdata progbits alloc noexec write align=4 tls
5561 \c section .tbss nobits alloc noexec write align=4 tls
5562 \c section .comment progbits noalloc noexec nowrite align=1
5563 \c section other progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=1
5565 (Any section name other than those in the above table
5566 is treated by default like \c{other} in the above table.
5567 Please note that section names are case sensitive.)
5570 \S{elfwrt} \i{Position-Independent Code}\I{PIC}: \c{elf} Special
5571 Symbols and \i\c{WRT}
5573 The \c{ELF} specification contains enough features to allow
5574 position-independent code (PIC) to be written, which makes \i{ELF
5575 shared libraries} very flexible. However, it also means NASM has to
5576 be able to generate a variety of ELF specific relocation types in ELF
5577 object files, if it is to be an assembler which can write PIC.
5579 Since \c{ELF} does not support segment-base references, the \c{WRT}
5580 operator is not used for its normal purpose; therefore NASM's
5581 \c{elf} output format makes use of \c{WRT} for a different purpose,
5582 namely the PIC-specific \I{relocations, PIC-specific}relocation
5585 \c{elf} defines five special symbols which you can use as the
5586 right-hand side of the \c{WRT} operator to obtain PIC relocation
5587 types. They are \i\c{..gotpc}, \i\c{..gotoff}, \i\c{..got},
5588 \i\c{..plt} and \i\c{..sym}. Their functions are summarized here:
5590 \b Referring to the symbol marking the global offset table base
5591 using \c{wrt ..gotpc} will end up giving the distance from the
5592 beginning of the current section to the global offset table.
5593 (\i\c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_} is the standard symbol name used to
5594 refer to the \i{GOT}.) So you would then need to add \i\c{$$} to the
5595 result to get the real address of the GOT.
5597 \b Referring to a location in one of your own sections using \c{wrt
5598 ..gotoff} will give the distance from the beginning of the GOT to
5599 the specified location, so that adding on the address of the GOT
5600 would give the real address of the location you wanted.
5602 \b Referring to an external or global symbol using \c{wrt ..got}
5603 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5604 address of the symbol, and the reference gives the distance from the
5605 beginning of the GOT to the entry; so you can add on the address of
5606 the GOT, load from the resulting address, and end up with the
5607 address of the symbol.
5609 \b Referring to a procedure name using \c{wrt ..plt} causes the
5610 linker to build a \i{procedure linkage table} entry for the symbol,
5611 and the reference gives the address of the \i{PLT} entry. You can
5612 only use this in contexts which would generate a PC-relative
5613 relocation normally (i.e. as the destination for \c{CALL} or
5614 \c{JMP}), since ELF contains no relocation type to refer to PLT
5617 \b Referring to a symbol name using \c{wrt ..sym} causes NASM to
5618 write an ordinary relocation, but instead of making the relocation
5619 relative to the start of the section and then adding on the offset
5620 to the symbol, it will write a relocation record aimed directly at
5621 the symbol in question. The distinction is a necessary one due to a
5622 peculiarity of the dynamic linker.
5624 A fuller explanation of how to use these relocation types to write
5625 shared libraries entirely in NASM is given in \k{picdll}.
5627 \S{elftls} \i{Thread Local Storage}\I{TLS}: \c{elf} Special
5628 Symbols and \i\c{WRT}
5630 \b In ELF32 mode, referring to an external or global symbol using
5631 \c{wrt ..tlsie} \I\c{..tlsie}
5632 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5633 offset of the symbol within the TLS block, so you can access the value
5634 of the symbol with code such as:
5636 \c mov eax,[tid wrt ..tlsie]
5640 \b In ELF64 mode, referring to an external or global symbol using
5641 \c{wrt ..gottpoff} \I\c{..gottpoff}
5642 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5643 offset of the symbol within the TLS block, so you can access the value
5644 of the symbol with code such as:
5646 \c mov rax,[rel tid wrt ..gottpoff]
5650 \S{elfglob} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} Directive\I{GLOBAL,
5651 elf extensions to}\I{GLOBAL, aoutb extensions to}
5653 \c{ELF} object files can contain more information about a global symbol
5654 than just its address: they can contain the \I{symbol sizes,
5655 specifying}\I{size, of symbols}size of the symbol and its \I{symbol
5656 types, specifying}\I{type, of symbols}type as well. These are not
5657 merely debugger conveniences, but are actually necessary when the
5658 program being written is a \i{shared library}. NASM therefore
5659 supports some extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} directive, allowing you
5660 to specify these features.
5662 You can specify whether a global variable is a function or a data
5663 object by suffixing the name with a colon and the word
5664 \i\c{function} or \i\c{data}. (\i\c{object} is a synonym for
5665 \c{data}.) For example:
5667 \c global hashlookup:function, hashtable:data
5669 exports the global symbol \c{hashlookup} as a function and
5670 \c{hashtable} as a data object.
5672 Optionally, you can control the ELF visibility of the symbol. Just
5673 add one of the visibility keywords: \i\c{default}, \i\c{internal},
5674 \i\c{hidden}, or \i\c{protected}. The default is \i\c{default} of
5675 course. For example, to make \c{hashlookup} hidden:
5677 \c global hashlookup:function hidden
5679 You can also specify the size of the data associated with the
5680 symbol, as a numeric expression (which may involve labels, and even
5681 forward references) after the type specifier. Like this:
5683 \c global hashtable:data (hashtable.end - hashtable)
5686 \c db this,that,theother ; some data here
5689 This makes NASM automatically calculate the length of the table and
5690 place that information into the \c{ELF} symbol table.
5692 Declaring the type and size of global symbols is necessary when
5693 writing shared library code. For more information, see
5697 \S{elfcomm} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{COMMON} Directive
5698 \I{COMMON, elf extensions to}
5700 \c{ELF} also allows you to specify alignment requirements \I{common
5701 variables, alignment in elf}\I{alignment, of elf common variables}on
5702 common variables. This is done by putting a number (which must be a
5703 power of two) after the name and size of the common variable,
5704 separated (as usual) by a colon. For example, an array of
5705 doublewords would benefit from 4-byte alignment:
5707 \c common dwordarray 128:4
5709 This declares the total size of the array to be 128 bytes, and
5710 requires that it be aligned on a 4-byte boundary.
5713 \S{elf16} 16-bit code and ELF
5714 \I{ELF, 16-bit code and}
5716 The \c{ELF32} specification doesn't provide relocations for 8- and
5717 16-bit values, but the GNU \c{ld} linker adds these as an extension.
5718 NASM can generate GNU-compatible relocations, to allow 16-bit code to
5719 be linked as ELF using GNU \c{ld}. If NASM is used with the
5720 \c{-w+gnu-elf-extensions} option, a warning is issued when one of
5721 these relocations is generated.
5723 \S{elfdbg} Debug formats and ELF
5724 \I{ELF, Debug formats and}
5726 \c{ELF32} and \c{ELF64} provide debug information in \c{STABS} and \c{DWARF} formats.
5727 Line number information is generated for all executable sections, but please
5728 note that only the ".text" section is executable by default.
5730 \H{aoutfmt} \i\c{aout}: Linux \I{a.out, Linux version}\I{linux, a.out}\c{a.out} Object Files
5732 The \c{aout} format generates \c{a.out} object files, in the form used
5733 by early Linux systems (current Linux systems use ELF, see
5734 \k{elffmt}.) These differ from other \c{a.out} object files in that
5735 the magic number in the first four bytes of the file is
5736 different; also, some implementations of \c{a.out}, for example
5737 NetBSD's, support position-independent code, which Linux's
5738 implementation does not.
5740 \c{a.out} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5742 \c{a.out} is a very simple object format. It supports no special
5743 directives, no special symbols, no use of \c{SEG} or \c{WRT}, and no
5744 extensions to any standard directives. It supports only the three
5745 \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5748 \H{aoutfmt} \i\c{aoutb}: \i{NetBSD}/\i{FreeBSD}/\i{OpenBSD}
5749 \I{a.out, BSD version}\c{a.out} Object Files
5751 The \c{aoutb} format generates \c{a.out} object files, in the form
5752 used by the various free \c{BSD Unix} clones, \c{NetBSD}, \c{FreeBSD}
5753 and \c{OpenBSD}. For simple object files, this object format is exactly
5754 the same as \c{aout} except for the magic number in the first four bytes
5755 of the file. However, the \c{aoutb} format supports
5756 \I{PIC}\i{position-independent code} in the same way as the \c{elf}
5757 format, so you can use it to write \c{BSD} \i{shared libraries}.
5759 \c{aoutb} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5761 \c{aoutb} supports no special directives, no special symbols, and
5762 only the three \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data}
5763 and \i\c{.bss}. However, it also supports the same use of \i\c{WRT} as
5764 \c{elf} does, to provide position-independent code relocation types.
5765 See \k{elfwrt} for full documentation of this feature.
5767 \c{aoutb} also supports the same extensions to the \c{GLOBAL}
5768 directive as \c{elf} does: see \k{elfglob} for documentation of
5772 \H{as86fmt} \c{as86}: \i{Minix}/Linux\I{linux, as86} \i\c{as86} Object Files
5774 The Minix/Linux 16-bit assembler \c{as86} has its own non-standard
5775 object file format. Although its companion linker \i\c{ld86} produces
5776 something close to ordinary \c{a.out} binaries as output, the object
5777 file format used to communicate between \c{as86} and \c{ld86} is not
5780 NASM supports this format, just in case it is useful, as \c{as86}.
5781 \c{as86} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5783 \c{as86} is a very simple object format (from the NASM user's point
5784 of view). It supports no special directives, no use of \c{SEG} or \c{WRT},
5785 and no extensions to any standard directives. It supports only the three
5786 \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}. The
5787 only special symbol supported is \c{..start}.
5790 \H{rdffmt} \I{RDOFF}\i\c{rdf}: \i{Relocatable Dynamic Object File
5793 The \c{rdf} output format produces \c{RDOFF} object files. \c{RDOFF}
5794 (Relocatable Dynamic Object File Format) is a home-grown object-file
5795 format, designed alongside NASM itself and reflecting in its file
5796 format the internal structure of the assembler.
5798 \c{RDOFF} is not used by any well-known operating systems. Those
5799 writing their own systems, however, may well wish to use \c{RDOFF}
5800 as their object format, on the grounds that it is designed primarily
5801 for simplicity and contains very little file-header bureaucracy.
5803 The Unix NASM archive, and the DOS archive which includes sources,
5804 both contain an \I{rdoff subdirectory}\c{rdoff} subdirectory holding
5805 a set of RDOFF utilities: an RDF linker, an \c{RDF} static-library
5806 manager, an RDF file dump utility, and a program which will load and
5807 execute an RDF executable under Linux.
5809 \c{rdf} supports only the \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text},
5810 \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5813 \S{rdflib} Requiring a Library: The \i\c{LIBRARY} Directive
5815 \c{RDOFF} contains a mechanism for an object file to demand a given
5816 library to be linked to the module, either at load time or run time.
5817 This is done by the \c{LIBRARY} directive, which takes one argument
5818 which is the name of the module:
5820 \c library mylib.rdl
5823 \S{rdfmod} Specifying a Module Name: The \i\c{MODULE} Directive
5825 Special \c{RDOFF} header record is used to store the name of the module.
5826 It can be used, for example, by run-time loader to perform dynamic
5827 linking. \c{MODULE} directive takes one argument which is the name
5832 Note that when you statically link modules and tell linker to strip
5833 the symbols from output file, all module names will be stripped too.
5834 To avoid it, you should start module names with \I{$, prefix}\c{$}, like:
5836 \c module $kernel.core
5839 \S{rdfglob} \c{rdf} Extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} Directive\I{GLOBAL,
5842 \c{RDOFF} global symbols can contain additional information needed by
5843 the static linker. You can mark a global symbol as exported, thus
5844 telling the linker do not strip it from target executable or library
5845 file. Like in \c{ELF}, you can also specify whether an exported symbol
5846 is a procedure (function) or data object.
5848 Suffixing the name with a colon and the word \i\c{export} you make the
5851 \c global sys_open:export
5853 To specify that exported symbol is a procedure (function), you add the
5854 word \i\c{proc} or \i\c{function} after declaration:
5856 \c global sys_open:export proc
5858 Similarly, to specify exported data object, add the word \i\c{data}
5859 or \i\c{object} to the directive:
5861 \c global kernel_ticks:export data
5864 \S{rdfimpt} \c{rdf} Extensions to the \c{EXTERN} Directive\I{EXTERN,
5867 By default the \c{EXTERN} directive in \c{RDOFF} declares a "pure external"
5868 symbol (i.e. the static linker will complain if such a symbol is not resolved).
5869 To declare an "imported" symbol, which must be resolved later during a dynamic
5870 linking phase, \c{RDOFF} offers an additional \c{import} modifier. As in
5871 \c{GLOBAL}, you can also specify whether an imported symbol is a procedure
5872 (function) or data object. For example:
5875 \c extern _open:import
5876 \c extern _printf:import proc
5877 \c extern _errno:import data
5879 Here the directive \c{LIBRARY} is also included, which gives the dynamic linker
5880 a hint as to where to find requested symbols.
5883 \H{dbgfmt} \i\c{dbg}: Debugging Format
5885 The \c{dbg} output format is not built into NASM in the default
5886 configuration. If you are building your own NASM executable from the
5887 sources, you can define \i\c{OF_DBG} in \c{output/outform.h} or on the
5888 compiler command line, and obtain the \c{dbg} output format.
5890 The \c{dbg} format does not output an object file as such; instead,
5891 it outputs a text file which contains a complete list of all the
5892 transactions between the main body of NASM and the output-format
5893 back end module. It is primarily intended to aid people who want to
5894 write their own output drivers, so that they can get a clearer idea
5895 of the various requests the main program makes of the output driver,
5896 and in what order they happen.
5898 For simple files, one can easily use the \c{dbg} format like this:
5900 \c nasm -f dbg filename.asm
5902 which will generate a diagnostic file called \c{filename.dbg}.
5903 However, this will not work well on files which were designed for a
5904 different object format, because each object format defines its own
5905 macros (usually user-level forms of directives), and those macros
5906 will not be defined in the \c{dbg} format. Therefore it can be
5907 useful to run NASM twice, in order to do the preprocessing with the
5908 native object format selected:
5910 \c nasm -e -f rdf -o rdfprog.i rdfprog.asm
5911 \c nasm -a -f dbg rdfprog.i
5913 This preprocesses \c{rdfprog.asm} into \c{rdfprog.i}, keeping the
5914 \c{rdf} object format selected in order to make sure RDF special
5915 directives are converted into primitive form correctly. Then the
5916 preprocessed source is fed through the \c{dbg} format to generate
5917 the final diagnostic output.
5919 This workaround will still typically not work for programs intended
5920 for \c{obj} format, because the \c{obj} \c{SEGMENT} and \c{GROUP}
5921 directives have side effects of defining the segment and group names
5922 as symbols; \c{dbg} will not do this, so the program will not
5923 assemble. You will have to work around that by defining the symbols
5924 yourself (using \c{EXTERN}, for example) if you really need to get a
5925 \c{dbg} trace of an \c{obj}-specific source file.
5927 \c{dbg} accepts any section name and any directives at all, and logs
5928 them all to its output file.
5931 \C{16bit} Writing 16-bit Code (DOS, Windows 3/3.1)
5933 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues encountered
5934 when writing 16-bit code to run under \c{MS-DOS} or \c{Windows 3.x}. It
5935 covers how to link programs to produce \c{.EXE} or \c{.COM} files,
5936 how to write \c{.SYS} device drivers, and how to interface assembly
5937 language code with 16-bit C compilers and with Borland Pascal.
5940 \H{exefiles} Producing \i\c{.EXE} Files
5942 Any large program written under DOS needs to be built as a \c{.EXE}
5943 file: only \c{.EXE} files have the necessary internal structure
5944 required to span more than one 64K segment. \i{Windows} programs,
5945 also, have to be built as \c{.EXE} files, since Windows does not
5946 support the \c{.COM} format.
5948 In general, you generate \c{.EXE} files by using the \c{obj} output
5949 format to produce one or more \i\c{.OBJ} files, and then linking
5950 them together using a linker. However, NASM also supports the direct
5951 generation of simple DOS \c{.EXE} files using the \c{bin} output
5952 format (by using \c{DB} and \c{DW} to construct the \c{.EXE} file
5953 header), and a macro package is supplied to do this. Thanks to
5954 Yann Guidon for contributing the code for this.
5956 NASM may also support \c{.EXE} natively as another output format in
5960 \S{objexe} Using the \c{obj} Format To Generate \c{.EXE} Files
5962 This section describes the usual method of generating \c{.EXE} files
5963 by linking \c{.OBJ} files together.
5965 Most 16-bit programming language packages come with a suitable
5966 linker; if you have none of these, there is a free linker called
5967 \i{VAL}\I{linker, free}, available in \c{LZH} archive format from
5968 \W{ftp://x2ftp.oulu.fi/pub/msdos/programming/lang/}\i\c{x2ftp.oulu.fi}.
5969 An LZH archiver can be found at
5970 \W{ftp://ftp.simtel.net/pub/simtelnet/msdos/arcers}\i\c{ftp.simtel.net}.
5971 There is another `free' linker (though this one doesn't come with
5972 sources) called \i{FREELINK}, available from
5973 \W{http://www.pcorner.com/tpc/old/3-101.html}\i\c{www.pcorner.com}.
5974 A third, \i\c{djlink}, written by DJ Delorie, is available at
5975 \W{http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/16bit/djlink/}\i\c{www.delorie.com}.
5976 A fourth linker, \i\c{ALINK}, written by Anthony A.J. Williams, is
5977 available at \W{http://alink.sourceforge.net}\i\c{alink.sourceforge.net}.
5979 When linking several \c{.OBJ} files into a \c{.EXE} file, you should
5980 ensure that exactly one of them has a start point defined (using the
5981 \I{program entry point}\i\c{..start} special symbol defined by the
5982 \c{obj} format: see \k{dotdotstart}). If no module defines a start
5983 point, the linker will not know what value to give the entry-point
5984 field in the output file header; if more than one defines a start
5985 point, the linker will not know \e{which} value to use.
5987 An example of a NASM source file which can be assembled to a
5988 \c{.OBJ} file and linked on its own to a \c{.EXE} is given here. It
5989 demonstrates the basic principles of defining a stack, initialising
5990 the segment registers, and declaring a start point. This file is
5991 also provided in the \I{test subdirectory}\c{test} subdirectory of
5992 the NASM archives, under the name \c{objexe.asm}.
6003 This initial piece of code sets up \c{DS} to point to the data
6004 segment, and initializes \c{SS} and \c{SP} to point to the top of
6005 the provided stack. Notice that interrupts are implicitly disabled
6006 for one instruction after a move into \c{SS}, precisely for this
6007 situation, so that there's no chance of an interrupt occurring
6008 between the loads of \c{SS} and \c{SP} and not having a stack to
6011 Note also that the special symbol \c{..start} is defined at the
6012 beginning of this code, which means that will be the entry point
6013 into the resulting executable file.
6019 The above is the main program: load \c{DS:DX} with a pointer to the
6020 greeting message (\c{hello} is implicitly relative to the segment
6021 \c{data}, which was loaded into \c{DS} in the setup code, so the
6022 full pointer is valid), and call the DOS print-string function.
6027 This terminates the program using another DOS system call.
6031 \c hello: db 'hello, world', 13, 10, '$'
6033 The data segment contains the string we want to display.
6035 \c segment stack stack
6039 The above code declares a stack segment containing 64 bytes of
6040 uninitialized stack space, and points \c{stacktop} at the top of it.
6041 The directive \c{segment stack stack} defines a segment \e{called}
6042 \c{stack}, and also of \e{type} \c{STACK}. The latter is not
6043 necessary to the correct running of the program, but linkers are
6044 likely to issue warnings or errors if your program has no segment of
6047 The above file, when assembled into a \c{.OBJ} file, will link on
6048 its own to a valid \c{.EXE} file, which when run will print `hello,
6049 world' and then exit.
6052 \S{binexe} Using the \c{bin} Format To Generate \c{.EXE} Files
6054 The \c{.EXE} file format is simple enough that it's possible to
6055 build a \c{.EXE} file by writing a pure-binary program and sticking
6056 a 32-byte header on the front. This header is simple enough that it
6057 can be generated using \c{DB} and \c{DW} commands by NASM itself, so
6058 that you can use the \c{bin} output format to directly generate
6061 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc subdirectory}\c{misc}
6062 subdirectory, is a file \i\c{exebin.mac} of macros. It defines three
6063 macros: \i\c{EXE_begin}, \i\c{EXE_stack} and \i\c{EXE_end}.
6065 To produce a \c{.EXE} file using this method, you should start by
6066 using \c{%include} to load the \c{exebin.mac} macro package into
6067 your source file. You should then issue the \c{EXE_begin} macro call
6068 (which takes no arguments) to generate the file header data. Then
6069 write code as normal for the \c{bin} format - you can use all three
6070 standard sections \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}. At the end of
6071 the file you should call the \c{EXE_end} macro (again, no arguments),
6072 which defines some symbols to mark section sizes, and these symbols
6073 are referred to in the header code generated by \c{EXE_begin}.
6075 In this model, the code you end up writing starts at \c{0x100}, just
6076 like a \c{.COM} file - in fact, if you strip off the 32-byte header
6077 from the resulting \c{.EXE} file, you will have a valid \c{.COM}
6078 program. All the segment bases are the same, so you are limited to a
6079 64K program, again just like a \c{.COM} file. Note that an \c{ORG}
6080 directive is issued by the \c{EXE_begin} macro, so you should not
6081 explicitly issue one of your own.
6083 You can't directly refer to your segment base value, unfortunately,
6084 since this would require a relocation in the header, and things
6085 would get a lot more complicated. So you should get your segment
6086 base by copying it out of \c{CS} instead.
6088 On entry to your \c{.EXE} file, \c{SS:SP} are already set up to
6089 point to the top of a 2Kb stack. You can adjust the default stack
6090 size of 2Kb by calling the \c{EXE_stack} macro. For example, to
6091 change the stack size of your program to 64 bytes, you would call
6094 A sample program which generates a \c{.EXE} file in this way is
6095 given in the \c{test} subdirectory of the NASM archive, as
6099 \H{comfiles} Producing \i\c{.COM} Files
6101 While large DOS programs must be written as \c{.EXE} files, small
6102 ones are often better written as \c{.COM} files. \c{.COM} files are
6103 pure binary, and therefore most easily produced using the \c{bin}
6107 \S{combinfmt} Using the \c{bin} Format To Generate \c{.COM} Files
6109 \c{.COM} files expect to be loaded at offset \c{100h} into their
6110 segment (though the segment may change). Execution then begins at
6111 \I\c{ORG}\c{100h}, i.e. right at the start of the program. So to
6112 write a \c{.COM} program, you would create a source file looking
6120 \c ; put your code here
6124 \c ; put data items here
6128 \c ; put uninitialized data here
6130 The \c{bin} format puts the \c{.text} section first in the file, so
6131 you can declare data or BSS items before beginning to write code if
6132 you want to and the code will still end up at the front of the file
6135 The BSS (uninitialized data) section does not take up space in the
6136 \c{.COM} file itself: instead, addresses of BSS items are resolved
6137 to point at space beyond the end of the file, on the grounds that
6138 this will be free memory when the program is run. Therefore you
6139 should not rely on your BSS being initialized to all zeros when you
6142 To assemble the above program, you should use a command line like
6144 \c nasm myprog.asm -fbin -o myprog.com
6146 The \c{bin} format would produce a file called \c{myprog} if no
6147 explicit output file name were specified, so you have to override it
6148 and give the desired file name.
6151 \S{comobjfmt} Using the \c{obj} Format To Generate \c{.COM} Files
6153 If you are writing a \c{.COM} program as more than one module, you
6154 may wish to assemble several \c{.OBJ} files and link them together
6155 into a \c{.COM} program. You can do this, provided you have a linker
6156 capable of outputting \c{.COM} files directly (\i{TLINK} does this),
6157 or alternatively a converter program such as \i\c{EXE2BIN} to
6158 transform the \c{.EXE} file output from the linker into a \c{.COM}
6161 If you do this, you need to take care of several things:
6163 \b The first object file containing code should start its code
6164 segment with a line like \c{RESB 100h}. This is to ensure that the
6165 code begins at offset \c{100h} relative to the beginning of the code
6166 segment, so that the linker or converter program does not have to
6167 adjust address references within the file when generating the
6168 \c{.COM} file. Other assemblers use an \i\c{ORG} directive for this
6169 purpose, but \c{ORG} in NASM is a format-specific directive to the
6170 \c{bin} output format, and does not mean the same thing as it does
6171 in MASM-compatible assemblers.
6173 \b You don't need to define a stack segment.
6175 \b All your segments should be in the same group, so that every time
6176 your code or data references a symbol offset, all offsets are
6177 relative to the same segment base. This is because, when a \c{.COM}
6178 file is loaded, all the segment registers contain the same value.
6181 \H{sysfiles} Producing \i\c{.SYS} Files
6183 \i{MS-DOS device drivers} - \c{.SYS} files - are pure binary files,
6184 similar to \c{.COM} files, except that they start at origin zero
6185 rather than \c{100h}. Therefore, if you are writing a device driver
6186 using the \c{bin} format, you do not need the \c{ORG} directive,
6187 since the default origin for \c{bin} is zero. Similarly, if you are
6188 using \c{obj}, you do not need the \c{RESB 100h} at the start of
6191 \c{.SYS} files start with a header structure, containing pointers to
6192 the various routines inside the driver which do the work. This
6193 structure should be defined at the start of the code segment, even
6194 though it is not actually code.
6196 For more information on the format of \c{.SYS} files, and the data
6197 which has to go in the header structure, a list of books is given in
6198 the Frequently Asked Questions list for the newsgroup
6199 \W{news:comp.os.msdos.programmer}\i\c{comp.os.msdos.programmer}.
6202 \H{16c} Interfacing to 16-bit C Programs
6204 This section covers the basics of writing assembly routines that
6205 call, or are called from, C programs. To do this, you would
6206 typically write an assembly module as a \c{.OBJ} file, and link it
6207 with your C modules to produce a \i{mixed-language program}.
6210 \S{16cunder} External Symbol Names
6212 \I{C symbol names}\I{underscore, in C symbols}C compilers have the
6213 convention that the names of all global symbols (functions or data)
6214 they define are formed by prefixing an underscore to the name as it
6215 appears in the C program. So, for example, the function a C
6216 programmer thinks of as \c{printf} appears to an assembly language
6217 programmer as \c{_printf}. This means that in your assembly
6218 programs, you can define symbols without a leading underscore, and
6219 not have to worry about name clashes with C symbols.
6221 If you find the underscores inconvenient, you can define macros to
6222 replace the \c{GLOBAL} and \c{EXTERN} directives as follows:
6238 (These forms of the macros only take one argument at a time; a
6239 \c{%rep} construct could solve this.)
6241 If you then declare an external like this:
6245 then the macro will expand it as
6248 \c %define printf _printf
6250 Thereafter, you can reference \c{printf} as if it was a symbol, and
6251 the preprocessor will put the leading underscore on where necessary.
6253 The \c{cglobal} macro works similarly. You must use \c{cglobal}
6254 before defining the symbol in question, but you would have had to do
6255 that anyway if you used \c{GLOBAL}.
6257 Also see \k{opt-pfix}.
6259 \S{16cmodels} \i{Memory Models}
6261 NASM contains no mechanism to support the various C memory models
6262 directly; you have to keep track yourself of which one you are
6263 writing for. This means you have to keep track of the following
6266 \b In models using a single code segment (tiny, small and compact),
6267 functions are near. This means that function pointers, when stored
6268 in data segments or pushed on the stack as function arguments, are
6269 16 bits long and contain only an offset field (the \c{CS} register
6270 never changes its value, and always gives the segment part of the
6271 full function address), and that functions are called using ordinary
6272 near \c{CALL} instructions and return using \c{RETN} (which, in
6273 NASM, is synonymous with \c{RET} anyway). This means both that you
6274 should write your own routines to return with \c{RETN}, and that you
6275 should call external C routines with near \c{CALL} instructions.
6277 \b In models using more than one code segment (medium, large and
6278 huge), functions are far. This means that function pointers are 32
6279 bits long (consisting of a 16-bit offset followed by a 16-bit
6280 segment), and that functions are called using \c{CALL FAR} (or
6281 \c{CALL seg:offset}) and return using \c{RETF}. Again, you should
6282 therefore write your own routines to return with \c{RETF} and use
6283 \c{CALL FAR} to call external routines.
6285 \b In models using a single data segment (tiny, small and medium),
6286 data pointers are 16 bits long, containing only an offset field (the
6287 \c{DS} register doesn't change its value, and always gives the
6288 segment part of the full data item address).
6290 \b In models using more than one data segment (compact, large and
6291 huge), data pointers are 32 bits long, consisting of a 16-bit offset
6292 followed by a 16-bit segment. You should still be careful not to
6293 modify \c{DS} in your routines without restoring it afterwards, but
6294 \c{ES} is free for you to use to access the contents of 32-bit data
6295 pointers you are passed.
6297 \b The huge memory model allows single data items to exceed 64K in
6298 size. In all other memory models, you can access the whole of a data
6299 item just by doing arithmetic on the offset field of the pointer you
6300 are given, whether a segment field is present or not; in huge model,
6301 you have to be more careful of your pointer arithmetic.
6303 \b In most memory models, there is a \e{default} data segment, whose
6304 segment address is kept in \c{DS} throughout the program. This data
6305 segment is typically the same segment as the stack, kept in \c{SS},
6306 so that functions' local variables (which are stored on the stack)
6307 and global data items can both be accessed easily without changing
6308 \c{DS}. Particularly large data items are typically stored in other
6309 segments. However, some memory models (though not the standard
6310 ones, usually) allow the assumption that \c{SS} and \c{DS} hold the
6311 same value to be removed. Be careful about functions' local
6312 variables in this latter case.
6314 In models with a single code segment, the segment is called
6315 \i\c{_TEXT}, so your code segment must also go by this name in order
6316 to be linked into the same place as the main code segment. In models
6317 with a single data segment, or with a default data segment, it is
6321 \S{16cfunc} Function Definitions and Function Calls
6323 \I{functions, C calling convention}The \i{C calling convention} in
6324 16-bit programs is as follows. In the following description, the
6325 words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are used to denote the function
6326 doing the calling and the function which gets called.
6328 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6329 after another, in reverse order (right to left, so that the first
6330 argument specified to the function is pushed last).
6332 \b The caller then executes a \c{CALL} instruction to pass control
6333 to the callee. This \c{CALL} is either near or far depending on the
6336 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6337 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6338 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{SP} in \c{BP} so as to
6339 be able to use \c{BP} as a base pointer to find its parameters on
6340 the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so part
6341 of the calling convention states that \c{BP} must be preserved by
6342 any C function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up \c{BP} as
6343 a \i\e{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6345 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{BP}.
6346 The word at \c{[BP]} holds the previous value of \c{BP} as it was
6347 pushed; the next word, at \c{[BP+2]}, holds the offset part of the
6348 return address, pushed implicitly by \c{CALL}. In a small-model
6349 (near) function, the parameters start after that, at \c{[BP+4]}; in
6350 a large-model (far) function, the segment part of the return address
6351 lives at \c{[BP+4]}, and the parameters begin at \c{[BP+6]}. The
6352 leftmost parameter of the function, since it was pushed last, is
6353 accessible at this offset from \c{BP}; the others follow, at
6354 successively greater offsets. Thus, in a function such as \c{printf}
6355 which takes a variable number of parameters, the pushing of the
6356 parameters in reverse order means that the function knows where to
6357 find its first parameter, which tells it the number and type of the
6360 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{SP} further, so as to
6361 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6362 accessible at negative offsets from \c{BP}.
6364 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6365 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{DX:AX} depending on the size
6366 of the value. Floating-point results are sometimes (depending on the
6367 compiler) returned in \c{ST0}.
6369 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{SP} from
6370 \c{BP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6371 value of \c{BP}, and returns via \c{RETN} or \c{RETF} depending on
6374 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6375 parameters are still on the stack, so it typically adds an immediate
6376 constant to \c{SP} to remove them (instead of executing a number of
6377 slow \c{POP} instructions). Thus, if a function is accidentally
6378 called with the wrong number of parameters due to a prototype
6379 mismatch, the stack will still be returned to a sensible state since
6380 the caller, which \e{knows} how many parameters it pushed, does the
6383 It is instructive to compare this calling convention with that for
6384 Pascal programs (described in \k{16bpfunc}). Pascal has a simpler
6385 convention, since no functions have variable numbers of parameters.
6386 Therefore the callee knows how many parameters it should have been
6387 passed, and is able to deallocate them from the stack itself by
6388 passing an immediate argument to the \c{RET} or \c{RETF}
6389 instruction, so the caller does not have to do it. Also, the
6390 parameters are pushed in left-to-right order, not right-to-left,
6391 which means that a compiler can give better guarantees about
6392 sequence points without performance suffering.
6394 Thus, you would define a function in C style in the following way.
6395 The following example is for small model:
6402 \c sub sp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6403 \c mov bx,[bp+4] ; first parameter to function
6407 \c mov sp,bp ; undo "sub sp,0x40" above
6411 For a large-model function, you would replace \c{RET} by \c{RETF},
6412 and look for the first parameter at \c{[BP+6]} instead of
6413 \c{[BP+4]}. Of course, if one of the parameters is a pointer, then
6414 the offsets of \e{subsequent} parameters will change depending on
6415 the memory model as well: far pointers take up four bytes on the
6416 stack when passed as a parameter, whereas near pointers take up two.
6418 At the other end of the process, to call a C function from your
6419 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6423 \c ; and then, further down...
6425 \c push word [myint] ; one of my integer variables
6426 \c push word mystring ; pointer into my data segment
6428 \c add sp,byte 4 ; `byte' saves space
6430 \c ; then those data items...
6435 \c mystring db 'This number -> %d <- should be 1234',10,0
6437 This piece of code is the small-model assembly equivalent of the C
6440 \c int myint = 1234;
6441 \c printf("This number -> %d <- should be 1234\n", myint);
6443 In large model, the function-call code might look more like this. In
6444 this example, it is assumed that \c{DS} already holds the segment
6445 base of the segment \c{_DATA}. If not, you would have to initialize
6448 \c push word [myint]
6449 \c push word seg mystring ; Now push the segment, and...
6450 \c push word mystring ; ... offset of "mystring"
6454 The integer value still takes up one word on the stack, since large
6455 model does not affect the size of the \c{int} data type. The first
6456 argument (pushed last) to \c{printf}, however, is a data pointer,
6457 and therefore has to contain a segment and offset part. The segment
6458 should be stored second in memory, and therefore must be pushed
6459 first. (Of course, \c{PUSH DS} would have been a shorter instruction
6460 than \c{PUSH WORD SEG mystring}, if \c{DS} was set up as the above
6461 example assumed.) Then the actual call becomes a far call, since
6462 functions expect far calls in large model; and \c{SP} has to be
6463 increased by 6 rather than 4 afterwards to make up for the extra
6467 \S{16cdata} Accessing Data Items
6469 To get at the contents of C variables, or to declare variables which
6470 C can access, you need only declare the names as \c{GLOBAL} or
6471 \c{EXTERN}. (Again, the names require leading underscores, as stated
6472 in \k{16cunder}.) Thus, a C variable declared as \c{int i} can be
6473 accessed from assembler as
6479 And to declare your own integer variable which C programs can access
6480 as \c{extern int j}, you do this (making sure you are assembling in
6481 the \c{_DATA} segment, if necessary):
6487 To access a C array, you need to know the size of the components of
6488 the array. For example, \c{int} variables are two bytes long, so if
6489 a C program declares an array as \c{int a[10]}, you can access
6490 \c{a[3]} by coding \c{mov ax,[_a+6]}. (The byte offset 6 is obtained
6491 by multiplying the desired array index, 3, by the size of the array
6492 element, 2.) The sizes of the C base types in 16-bit compilers are:
6493 1 for \c{char}, 2 for \c{short} and \c{int}, 4 for \c{long} and
6494 \c{float}, and 8 for \c{double}.
6496 To access a C \i{data structure}, you need to know the offset from
6497 the base of the structure to the field you are interested in. You
6498 can either do this by converting the C structure definition into a
6499 NASM structure definition (using \i\c{STRUC}), or by calculating the
6500 one offset and using just that.
6502 To do either of these, you should read your C compiler's manual to
6503 find out how it organizes data structures. NASM gives no special
6504 alignment to structure members in its own \c{STRUC} macro, so you
6505 have to specify alignment yourself if the C compiler generates it.
6506 Typically, you might find that a structure like
6513 might be four bytes long rather than three, since the \c{int} field
6514 would be aligned to a two-byte boundary. However, this sort of
6515 feature tends to be a configurable option in the C compiler, either
6516 using command-line options or \c{#pragma} lines, so you have to find
6517 out how your own compiler does it.
6520 \S{16cmacro} \i\c{c16.mac}: Helper Macros for the 16-bit C Interface
6522 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc subdirectory}\c{misc}
6523 directory, is a file \c{c16.mac} of macros. It defines three macros:
6524 \i\c{proc}, \i\c{arg} and \i\c{endproc}. These are intended to be
6525 used for C-style procedure definitions, and they automate a lot of
6526 the work involved in keeping track of the calling convention.
6528 (An alternative, TASM compatible form of \c{arg} is also now built
6529 into NASM's preprocessor. See \k{stackrel} for details.)
6531 An example of an assembly function using the macro set is given
6538 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6539 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6544 This defines \c{_nearproc} to be a procedure taking two arguments,
6545 the first (\c{i}) an integer and the second (\c{j}) a pointer to an
6546 integer. It returns \c{i + *j}.
6548 Note that the \c{arg} macro has an \c{EQU} as the first line of its
6549 expansion, and since the label before the macro call gets prepended
6550 to the first line of the expanded macro, the \c{EQU} works, defining
6551 \c{%$i} to be an offset from \c{BP}. A context-local variable is
6552 used, local to the context pushed by the \c{proc} macro and popped
6553 by the \c{endproc} macro, so that the same argument name can be used
6554 in later procedures. Of course, you don't \e{have} to do that.
6556 The macro set produces code for near functions (tiny, small and
6557 compact-model code) by default. You can have it generate far
6558 functions (medium, large and huge-model code) by means of coding
6559 \I\c{FARCODE}\c{%define FARCODE}. This changes the kind of return
6560 instruction generated by \c{endproc}, and also changes the starting
6561 point for the argument offsets. The macro set contains no intrinsic
6562 dependency on whether data pointers are far or not.
6564 \c{arg} can take an optional parameter, giving the size of the
6565 argument. If no size is given, 2 is assumed, since it is likely that
6566 many function parameters will be of type \c{int}.
6568 The large-model equivalent of the above function would look like this:
6576 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6577 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6578 \c mov es,[bp + %$j + 2]
6583 This makes use of the argument to the \c{arg} macro to define a
6584 parameter of size 4, because \c{j} is now a far pointer. When we
6585 load from \c{j}, we must load a segment and an offset.
6588 \H{16bp} Interfacing to \i{Borland Pascal} Programs
6590 Interfacing to Borland Pascal programs is similar in concept to
6591 interfacing to 16-bit C programs. The differences are:
6593 \b The leading underscore required for interfacing to C programs is
6594 not required for Pascal.
6596 \b The memory model is always large: functions are far, data
6597 pointers are far, and no data item can be more than 64K long.
6598 (Actually, some functions are near, but only those functions that
6599 are local to a Pascal unit and never called from outside it. All
6600 assembly functions that Pascal calls, and all Pascal functions that
6601 assembly routines are able to call, are far.) However, all static
6602 data declared in a Pascal program goes into the default data
6603 segment, which is the one whose segment address will be in \c{DS}
6604 when control is passed to your assembly code. The only things that
6605 do not live in the default data segment are local variables (they
6606 live in the stack segment) and dynamically allocated variables. All
6607 data \e{pointers}, however, are far.
6609 \b The function calling convention is different - described below.
6611 \b Some data types, such as strings, are stored differently.
6613 \b There are restrictions on the segment names you are allowed to
6614 use - Borland Pascal will ignore code or data declared in a segment
6615 it doesn't like the name of. The restrictions are described below.
6618 \S{16bpfunc} The Pascal Calling Convention
6620 \I{functions, Pascal calling convention}\I{Pascal calling
6621 convention}The 16-bit Pascal calling convention is as follows. In
6622 the following description, the words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are
6623 used to denote the function doing the calling and the function which
6626 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6627 after another, in normal order (left to right, so that the first
6628 argument specified to the function is pushed first).
6630 \b The caller then executes a far \c{CALL} instruction to pass
6631 control to the callee.
6633 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6634 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6635 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{SP} in \c{BP} so as to
6636 be able to use \c{BP} as a base pointer to find its parameters on
6637 the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so part
6638 of the calling convention states that \c{BP} must be preserved by
6639 any function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up \c{BP} as a
6640 \i{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6642 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{BP}.
6643 The word at \c{[BP]} holds the previous value of \c{BP} as it was
6644 pushed. The next word, at \c{[BP+2]}, holds the offset part of the
6645 return address, and the next one at \c{[BP+4]} the segment part. The
6646 parameters begin at \c{[BP+6]}. The rightmost parameter of the
6647 function, since it was pushed last, is accessible at this offset
6648 from \c{BP}; the others follow, at successively greater offsets.
6650 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{SP} further, so as to
6651 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6652 accessible at negative offsets from \c{BP}.
6654 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6655 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{DX:AX} depending on the size
6656 of the value. Floating-point results are returned in \c{ST0}.
6657 Results of type \c{Real} (Borland's own custom floating-point data
6658 type, not handled directly by the FPU) are returned in \c{DX:BX:AX}.
6659 To return a result of type \c{String}, the caller pushes a pointer
6660 to a temporary string before pushing the parameters, and the callee
6661 places the returned string value at that location. The pointer is
6662 not a parameter, and should not be removed from the stack by the
6663 \c{RETF} instruction.
6665 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{SP} from
6666 \c{BP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6667 value of \c{BP}, and returns via \c{RETF}. It uses the form of
6668 \c{RETF} with an immediate parameter, giving the number of bytes
6669 taken up by the parameters on the stack. This causes the parameters
6670 to be removed from the stack as a side effect of the return
6673 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6674 parameters have already been removed from the stack, so it needs to
6677 Thus, you would define a function in Pascal style, taking two
6678 \c{Integer}-type parameters, in the following way:
6684 \c sub sp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6685 \c mov bx,[bp+8] ; first parameter to function
6686 \c mov bx,[bp+6] ; second parameter to function
6690 \c mov sp,bp ; undo "sub sp,0x40" above
6692 \c retf 4 ; total size of params is 4
6694 At the other end of the process, to call a Pascal function from your
6695 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6699 \c ; and then, further down...
6701 \c push word seg mystring ; Now push the segment, and...
6702 \c push word mystring ; ... offset of "mystring"
6703 \c push word [myint] ; one of my variables
6704 \c call far SomeFunc
6706 This is equivalent to the Pascal code
6708 \c procedure SomeFunc(String: PChar; Int: Integer);
6709 \c SomeFunc(@mystring, myint);
6712 \S{16bpseg} Borland Pascal \I{segment names, Borland Pascal}Segment
6715 Since Borland Pascal's internal unit file format is completely
6716 different from \c{OBJ}, it only makes a very sketchy job of actually
6717 reading and understanding the various information contained in a
6718 real \c{OBJ} file when it links that in. Therefore an object file
6719 intended to be linked to a Pascal program must obey a number of
6722 \b Procedures and functions must be in a segment whose name is
6723 either \c{CODE}, \c{CSEG}, or something ending in \c{_TEXT}.
6725 \b initialized data must be in a segment whose name is either
6726 \c{CONST} or something ending in \c{_DATA}.
6728 \b Uninitialized data must be in a segment whose name is either
6729 \c{DATA}, \c{DSEG}, or something ending in \c{_BSS}.
6731 \b Any other segments in the object file are completely ignored.
6732 \c{GROUP} directives and segment attributes are also ignored.
6735 \S{16bpmacro} Using \i\c{c16.mac} With Pascal Programs
6737 The \c{c16.mac} macro package, described in \k{16cmacro}, can also
6738 be used to simplify writing functions to be called from Pascal
6739 programs, if you code \I\c{PASCAL}\c{%define PASCAL}. This
6740 definition ensures that functions are far (it implies
6741 \i\c{FARCODE}), and also causes procedure return instructions to be
6742 generated with an operand.
6744 Defining \c{PASCAL} does not change the code which calculates the
6745 argument offsets; you must declare your function's arguments in
6746 reverse order. For example:
6754 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6755 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6756 \c mov es,[bp + %$j + 2]
6761 This defines the same routine, conceptually, as the example in
6762 \k{16cmacro}: it defines a function taking two arguments, an integer
6763 and a pointer to an integer, which returns the sum of the integer
6764 and the contents of the pointer. The only difference between this
6765 code and the large-model C version is that \c{PASCAL} is defined
6766 instead of \c{FARCODE}, and that the arguments are declared in
6770 \C{32bit} Writing 32-bit Code (Unix, Win32, DJGPP)
6772 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues involved
6773 when writing 32-bit code, to run under \i{Win32} or Unix, or to be
6774 linked with C code generated by a Unix-style C compiler such as
6775 \i{DJGPP}. It covers how to write assembly code to interface with
6776 32-bit C routines, and how to write position-independent code for
6779 Almost all 32-bit code, and in particular all code running under
6780 \c{Win32}, \c{DJGPP} or any of the PC Unix variants, runs in \I{flat
6781 memory model}\e{flat} memory model. This means that the segment registers
6782 and paging have already been set up to give you the same 32-bit 4Gb
6783 address space no matter what segment you work relative to, and that
6784 you should ignore all segment registers completely. When writing
6785 flat-model application code, you never need to use a segment
6786 override or modify any segment register, and the code-section
6787 addresses you pass to \c{CALL} and \c{JMP} live in the same address
6788 space as the data-section addresses you access your variables by and
6789 the stack-section addresses you access local variables and procedure
6790 parameters by. Every address is 32 bits long and contains only an
6794 \H{32c} Interfacing to 32-bit C Programs
6796 A lot of the discussion in \k{16c}, about interfacing to 16-bit C
6797 programs, still applies when working in 32 bits. The absence of
6798 memory models or segmentation worries simplifies things a lot.
6801 \S{32cunder} External Symbol Names
6803 Most 32-bit C compilers share the convention used by 16-bit
6804 compilers, that the names of all global symbols (functions or data)
6805 they define are formed by prefixing an underscore to the name as it
6806 appears in the C program. However, not all of them do: the \c{ELF}
6807 specification states that C symbols do \e{not} have a leading
6808 underscore on their assembly-language names.
6810 The older Linux \c{a.out} C compiler, all \c{Win32} compilers,
6811 \c{DJGPP}, and \c{NetBSD} and \c{FreeBSD}, all use the leading
6812 underscore; for these compilers, the macros \c{cextern} and
6813 \c{cglobal}, as given in \k{16cunder}, will still work. For \c{ELF},
6814 though, the leading underscore should not be used.
6816 See also \k{opt-pfix}.
6818 \S{32cfunc} Function Definitions and Function Calls
6820 \I{functions, C calling convention}The \i{C calling convention}
6821 in 32-bit programs is as follows. In the following description,
6822 the words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are used to denote
6823 the function doing the calling and the function which gets called.
6825 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6826 after another, in reverse order (right to left, so that the first
6827 argument specified to the function is pushed last).
6829 \b The caller then executes a near \c{CALL} instruction to pass
6830 control to the callee.
6832 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6833 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6834 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{ESP} in \c{EBP} so as
6835 to be able to use \c{EBP} as a base pointer to find its parameters
6836 on the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so
6837 part of the calling convention states that \c{EBP} must be preserved
6838 by any C function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up
6839 \c{EBP} as a \i{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6841 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{EBP}.
6842 The doubleword at \c{[EBP]} holds the previous value of \c{EBP} as
6843 it was pushed; the next doubleword, at \c{[EBP+4]}, holds the return
6844 address, pushed implicitly by \c{CALL}. The parameters start after
6845 that, at \c{[EBP+8]}. The leftmost parameter of the function, since
6846 it was pushed last, is accessible at this offset from \c{EBP}; the
6847 others follow, at successively greater offsets. Thus, in a function
6848 such as \c{printf} which takes a variable number of parameters, the
6849 pushing of the parameters in reverse order means that the function
6850 knows where to find its first parameter, which tells it the number
6851 and type of the remaining ones.
6853 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{ESP} further, so as to
6854 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6855 accessible at negative offsets from \c{EBP}.
6857 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6858 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{EAX} depending on the size
6859 of the value. Floating-point results are typically returned in
6862 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{ESP} from
6863 \c{EBP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6864 value of \c{EBP}, and returns via \c{RET} (equivalently, \c{RETN}).
6866 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6867 parameters are still on the stack, so it typically adds an immediate
6868 constant to \c{ESP} to remove them (instead of executing a number of
6869 slow \c{POP} instructions). Thus, if a function is accidentally
6870 called with the wrong number of parameters due to a prototype
6871 mismatch, the stack will still be returned to a sensible state since
6872 the caller, which \e{knows} how many parameters it pushed, does the
6875 There is an alternative calling convention used by Win32 programs
6876 for Windows API calls, and also for functions called \e{by} the
6877 Windows API such as window procedures: they follow what Microsoft
6878 calls the \c{__stdcall} convention. This is slightly closer to the
6879 Pascal convention, in that the callee clears the stack by passing a
6880 parameter to the \c{RET} instruction. However, the parameters are
6881 still pushed in right-to-left order.
6883 Thus, you would define a function in C style in the following way:
6890 \c sub esp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6891 \c mov ebx,[ebp+8] ; first parameter to function
6895 \c leave ; mov esp,ebp / pop ebp
6898 At the other end of the process, to call a C function from your
6899 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6903 \c ; and then, further down...
6905 \c push dword [myint] ; one of my integer variables
6906 \c push dword mystring ; pointer into my data segment
6908 \c add esp,byte 8 ; `byte' saves space
6910 \c ; then those data items...
6915 \c mystring db 'This number -> %d <- should be 1234',10,0
6917 This piece of code is the assembly equivalent of the C code
6919 \c int myint = 1234;
6920 \c printf("This number -> %d <- should be 1234\n", myint);
6923 \S{32cdata} Accessing Data Items
6925 To get at the contents of C variables, or to declare variables which
6926 C can access, you need only declare the names as \c{GLOBAL} or
6927 \c{EXTERN}. (Again, the names require leading underscores, as stated
6928 in \k{32cunder}.) Thus, a C variable declared as \c{int i} can be
6929 accessed from assembler as
6934 And to declare your own integer variable which C programs can access
6935 as \c{extern int j}, you do this (making sure you are assembling in
6936 the \c{_DATA} segment, if necessary):
6941 To access a C array, you need to know the size of the components of
6942 the array. For example, \c{int} variables are four bytes long, so if
6943 a C program declares an array as \c{int a[10]}, you can access
6944 \c{a[3]} by coding \c{mov ax,[_a+12]}. (The byte offset 12 is obtained
6945 by multiplying the desired array index, 3, by the size of the array
6946 element, 4.) The sizes of the C base types in 32-bit compilers are:
6947 1 for \c{char}, 2 for \c{short}, 4 for \c{int}, \c{long} and
6948 \c{float}, and 8 for \c{double}. Pointers, being 32-bit addresses,
6949 are also 4 bytes long.
6951 To access a C \i{data structure}, you need to know the offset from
6952 the base of the structure to the field you are interested in. You
6953 can either do this by converting the C structure definition into a
6954 NASM structure definition (using \c{STRUC}), or by calculating the
6955 one offset and using just that.
6957 To do either of these, you should read your C compiler's manual to
6958 find out how it organizes data structures. NASM gives no special
6959 alignment to structure members in its own \i\c{STRUC} macro, so you
6960 have to specify alignment yourself if the C compiler generates it.
6961 Typically, you might find that a structure like
6968 might be eight bytes long rather than five, since the \c{int} field
6969 would be aligned to a four-byte boundary. However, this sort of
6970 feature is sometimes a configurable option in the C compiler, either
6971 using command-line options or \c{#pragma} lines, so you have to find
6972 out how your own compiler does it.
6975 \S{32cmacro} \i\c{c32.mac}: Helper Macros for the 32-bit C Interface
6977 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc directory}\c{misc}
6978 directory, is a file \c{c32.mac} of macros. It defines three macros:
6979 \i\c{proc}, \i\c{arg} and \i\c{endproc}. These are intended to be
6980 used for C-style procedure definitions, and they automate a lot of
6981 the work involved in keeping track of the calling convention.
6983 An example of an assembly function using the macro set is given
6990 \c mov eax,[ebp + %$i]
6991 \c mov ebx,[ebp + %$j]
6996 This defines \c{_proc32} to be a procedure taking two arguments, the
6997 first (\c{i}) an integer and the second (\c{j}) a pointer to an
6998 integer. It returns \c{i + *j}.
7000 Note that the \c{arg} macro has an \c{EQU} as the first line of its
7001 expansion, and since the label before the macro call gets prepended
7002 to the first line of the expanded macro, the \c{EQU} works, defining
7003 \c{%$i} to be an offset from \c{BP}. A context-local variable is
7004 used, local to the context pushed by the \c{proc} macro and popped
7005 by the \c{endproc} macro, so that the same argument name can be used
7006 in later procedures. Of course, you don't \e{have} to do that.
7008 \c{arg} can take an optional parameter, giving the size of the
7009 argument. If no size is given, 4 is assumed, since it is likely that
7010 many function parameters will be of type \c{int} or pointers.
7013 \H{picdll} Writing NetBSD/FreeBSD/OpenBSD and Linux/ELF \i{Shared
7016 \c{ELF} replaced the older \c{a.out} object file format under Linux
7017 because it contains support for \i{position-independent code}
7018 (\i{PIC}), which makes writing shared libraries much easier. NASM
7019 supports the \c{ELF} position-independent code features, so you can
7020 write Linux \c{ELF} shared libraries in NASM.
7022 \i{NetBSD}, and its close cousins \i{FreeBSD} and \i{OpenBSD}, take
7023 a different approach by hacking PIC support into the \c{a.out}
7024 format. NASM supports this as the \i\c{aoutb} output format, so you
7025 can write \i{BSD} shared libraries in NASM too.
7027 The operating system loads a PIC shared library by memory-mapping
7028 the library file at an arbitrarily chosen point in the address space
7029 of the running process. The contents of the library's code section
7030 must therefore not depend on where it is loaded in memory.
7032 Therefore, you cannot get at your variables by writing code like
7035 \c mov eax,[myvar] ; WRONG
7037 Instead, the linker provides an area of memory called the
7038 \i\e{global offset table}, or \i{GOT}; the GOT is situated at a
7039 constant distance from your library's code, so if you can find out
7040 where your library is loaded (which is typically done using a
7041 \c{CALL} and \c{POP} combination), you can obtain the address of the
7042 GOT, and you can then load the addresses of your variables out of
7043 linker-generated entries in the GOT.
7045 The \e{data} section of a PIC shared library does not have these
7046 restrictions: since the data section is writable, it has to be
7047 copied into memory anyway rather than just paged in from the library
7048 file, so as long as it's being copied it can be relocated too. So
7049 you can put ordinary types of relocation in the data section without
7050 too much worry (but see \k{picglobal} for a caveat).
7053 \S{picgot} Obtaining the Address of the GOT
7055 Each code module in your shared library should define the GOT as an
7058 \c extern _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ ; in ELF
7059 \c extern __GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ ; in BSD a.out
7061 At the beginning of any function in your shared library which plans
7062 to access your data or BSS sections, you must first calculate the
7063 address of the GOT. This is typically done by writing the function
7072 \c add ebx,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+$$-.get_GOT wrt ..gotpc
7074 \c ; the function body comes here
7081 (For BSD, again, the symbol \c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE} requires a
7082 second leading underscore.)
7084 The first two lines of this function are simply the standard C
7085 prologue to set up a stack frame, and the last three lines are
7086 standard C function epilogue. The third line, and the fourth to last
7087 line, save and restore the \c{EBX} register, because PIC shared
7088 libraries use this register to store the address of the GOT.
7090 The interesting bit is the \c{CALL} instruction and the following
7091 two lines. The \c{CALL} and \c{POP} combination obtains the address
7092 of the label \c{.get_GOT}, without having to know in advance where
7093 the program was loaded (since the \c{CALL} instruction is encoded
7094 relative to the current position). The \c{ADD} instruction makes use
7095 of one of the special PIC relocation types: \i{GOTPC relocation}.
7096 With the \i\c{WRT ..gotpc} qualifier specified, the symbol
7097 referenced (here \c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_}, the special symbol
7098 assigned to the GOT) is given as an offset from the beginning of the
7099 section. (Actually, \c{ELF} encodes it as the offset from the operand
7100 field of the \c{ADD} instruction, but NASM simplifies this
7101 deliberately, so you do things the same way for both \c{ELF} and
7102 \c{BSD}.) So the instruction then \e{adds} the beginning of the section,
7103 to get the real address of the GOT, and subtracts the value of
7104 \c{.get_GOT} which it knows is in \c{EBX}. Therefore, by the time
7105 that instruction has finished, \c{EBX} contains the address of the GOT.
7107 If you didn't follow that, don't worry: it's never necessary to
7108 obtain the address of the GOT by any other means, so you can put
7109 those three instructions into a macro and safely ignore them:
7116 \c add ebx,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+$$-%%getgot wrt ..gotpc
7120 \S{piclocal} Finding Your Local Data Items
7122 Having got the GOT, you can then use it to obtain the addresses of
7123 your data items. Most variables will reside in the sections you have
7124 declared; they can be accessed using the \I{GOTOFF
7125 relocation}\c{..gotoff} special \I\c{WRT ..gotoff}\c{WRT} type. The
7126 way this works is like this:
7128 \c lea eax,[ebx+myvar wrt ..gotoff]
7130 The expression \c{myvar wrt ..gotoff} is calculated, when the shared
7131 library is linked, to be the offset to the local variable \c{myvar}
7132 from the beginning of the GOT. Therefore, adding it to \c{EBX} as
7133 above will place the real address of \c{myvar} in \c{EAX}.
7135 If you declare variables as \c{GLOBAL} without specifying a size for
7136 them, they are shared between code modules in the library, but do
7137 not get exported from the library to the program that loaded it.
7138 They will still be in your ordinary data and BSS sections, so you
7139 can access them in the same way as local variables, using the above
7140 \c{..gotoff} mechanism.
7142 Note that due to a peculiarity of the way BSD \c{a.out} format
7143 handles this relocation type, there must be at least one non-local
7144 symbol in the same section as the address you're trying to access.
7147 \S{picextern} Finding External and Common Data Items
7149 If your library needs to get at an external variable (external to
7150 the \e{library}, not just to one of the modules within it), you must
7151 use the \I{GOT relocations}\I\c{WRT ..got}\c{..got} type to get at
7152 it. The \c{..got} type, instead of giving you the offset from the
7153 GOT base to the variable, gives you the offset from the GOT base to
7154 a GOT \e{entry} containing the address of the variable. The linker
7155 will set up this GOT entry when it builds the library, and the
7156 dynamic linker will place the correct address in it at load time. So
7157 to obtain the address of an external variable \c{extvar} in \c{EAX},
7160 \c mov eax,[ebx+extvar wrt ..got]
7162 This loads the address of \c{extvar} out of an entry in the GOT. The
7163 linker, when it builds the shared library, collects together every
7164 relocation of type \c{..got}, and builds the GOT so as to ensure it
7165 has every necessary entry present.
7167 Common variables must also be accessed in this way.
7170 \S{picglobal} Exporting Symbols to the Library User
7172 If you want to export symbols to the user of the library, you have
7173 to declare whether they are functions or data, and if they are data,
7174 you have to give the size of the data item. This is because the
7175 dynamic linker has to build \I{PLT}\i{procedure linkage table}
7176 entries for any exported functions, and also moves exported data
7177 items away from the library's data section in which they were
7180 So to export a function to users of the library, you must use
7182 \c global func:function ; declare it as a function
7188 And to export a data item such as an array, you would have to code
7190 \c global array:data array.end-array ; give the size too
7195 Be careful: If you export a variable to the library user, by
7196 declaring it as \c{GLOBAL} and supplying a size, the variable will
7197 end up living in the data section of the main program, rather than
7198 in your library's data section, where you declared it. So you will
7199 have to access your own global variable with the \c{..got} mechanism
7200 rather than \c{..gotoff}, as if it were external (which,
7201 effectively, it has become).
7203 Equally, if you need to store the address of an exported global in
7204 one of your data sections, you can't do it by means of the standard
7207 \c dataptr: dd global_data_item ; WRONG
7209 NASM will interpret this code as an ordinary relocation, in which
7210 \c{global_data_item} is merely an offset from the beginning of the
7211 \c{.data} section (or whatever); so this reference will end up
7212 pointing at your data section instead of at the exported global
7213 which resides elsewhere.
7215 Instead of the above code, then, you must write
7217 \c dataptr: dd global_data_item wrt ..sym
7219 which makes use of the special \c{WRT} type \I\c{WRT ..sym}\c{..sym}
7220 to instruct NASM to search the symbol table for a particular symbol
7221 at that address, rather than just relocating by section base.
7223 Either method will work for functions: referring to one of your
7224 functions by means of
7226 \c funcptr: dd my_function
7228 will give the user the address of the code you wrote, whereas
7230 \c funcptr: dd my_function wrt .sym
7232 will give the address of the procedure linkage table for the
7233 function, which is where the calling program will \e{believe} the
7234 function lives. Either address is a valid way to call the function.
7237 \S{picproc} Calling Procedures Outside the Library
7239 Calling procedures outside your shared library has to be done by
7240 means of a \i\e{procedure linkage table}, or \i{PLT}. The PLT is
7241 placed at a known offset from where the library is loaded, so the
7242 library code can make calls to the PLT in a position-independent
7243 way. Within the PLT there is code to jump to offsets contained in
7244 the GOT, so function calls to other shared libraries or to routines
7245 in the main program can be transparently passed off to their real
7248 To call an external routine, you must use another special PIC
7249 relocation type, \I{PLT relocations}\i\c{WRT ..plt}. This is much
7250 easier than the GOT-based ones: you simply replace calls such as
7251 \c{CALL printf} with the PLT-relative version \c{CALL printf WRT
7255 \S{link} Generating the Library File
7257 Having written some code modules and assembled them to \c{.o} files,
7258 you then generate your shared library with a command such as
7260 \c ld -shared -o library.so module1.o module2.o # for ELF
7261 \c ld -Bshareable -o library.so module1.o module2.o # for BSD
7263 For ELF, if your shared library is going to reside in system
7264 directories such as \c{/usr/lib} or \c{/lib}, it is usually worth
7265 using the \i\c{-soname} flag to the linker, to store the final
7266 library file name, with a version number, into the library:
7268 \c ld -shared -soname library.so.1 -o library.so.1.2 *.o
7270 You would then copy \c{library.so.1.2} into the library directory,
7271 and create \c{library.so.1} as a symbolic link to it.
7274 \C{mixsize} Mixing 16 and 32 Bit Code
7276 This chapter tries to cover some of the issues, largely related to
7277 unusual forms of addressing and jump instructions, encountered when
7278 writing operating system code such as protected-mode initialisation
7279 routines, which require code that operates in mixed segment sizes,
7280 such as code in a 16-bit segment trying to modify data in a 32-bit
7281 one, or jumps between different-size segments.
7284 \H{mixjump} Mixed-Size Jumps\I{jumps, mixed-size}
7286 \I{operating system, writing}\I{writing operating systems}The most
7287 common form of \i{mixed-size instruction} is the one used when
7288 writing a 32-bit OS: having done your setup in 16-bit mode, such as
7289 loading the kernel, you then have to boot it by switching into
7290 protected mode and jumping to the 32-bit kernel start address. In a
7291 fully 32-bit OS, this tends to be the \e{only} mixed-size
7292 instruction you need, since everything before it can be done in pure
7293 16-bit code, and everything after it can be pure 32-bit.
7295 This jump must specify a 48-bit far address, since the target
7296 segment is a 32-bit one. However, it must be assembled in a 16-bit
7297 segment, so just coding, for example,
7299 \c jmp 0x1234:0x56789ABC ; wrong!
7301 will not work, since the offset part of the address will be
7302 truncated to \c{0x9ABC} and the jump will be an ordinary 16-bit far
7305 The Linux kernel setup code gets round the inability of \c{as86} to
7306 generate the required instruction by coding it manually, using
7307 \c{DB} instructions. NASM can go one better than that, by actually
7308 generating the right instruction itself. Here's how to do it right:
7310 \c jmp dword 0x1234:0x56789ABC ; right
7312 \I\c{JMP DWORD}The \c{DWORD} prefix (strictly speaking, it should
7313 come \e{after} the colon, since it is declaring the \e{offset} field
7314 to be a doubleword; but NASM will accept either form, since both are
7315 unambiguous) forces the offset part to be treated as far, in the
7316 assumption that you are deliberately writing a jump from a 16-bit
7317 segment to a 32-bit one.
7319 You can do the reverse operation, jumping from a 32-bit segment to a
7320 16-bit one, by means of the \c{WORD} prefix:
7322 \c jmp word 0x8765:0x4321 ; 32 to 16 bit
7324 If the \c{WORD} prefix is specified in 16-bit mode, or the \c{DWORD}
7325 prefix in 32-bit mode, they will be ignored, since each is
7326 explicitly forcing NASM into a mode it was in anyway.
7329 \H{mixaddr} Addressing Between Different-Size Segments\I{addressing,
7330 mixed-size}\I{mixed-size addressing}
7332 If your OS is mixed 16 and 32-bit, or if you are writing a DOS
7333 extender, you are likely to have to deal with some 16-bit segments
7334 and some 32-bit ones. At some point, you will probably end up
7335 writing code in a 16-bit segment which has to access data in a
7336 32-bit segment, or vice versa.
7338 If the data you are trying to access in a 32-bit segment lies within
7339 the first 64K of the segment, you may be able to get away with using
7340 an ordinary 16-bit addressing operation for the purpose; but sooner
7341 or later, you will want to do 32-bit addressing from 16-bit mode.
7343 The easiest way to do this is to make sure you use a register for
7344 the address, since any effective address containing a 32-bit
7345 register is forced to be a 32-bit address. So you can do
7347 \c mov eax,offset_into_32_bit_segment_specified_by_fs
7348 \c mov dword [fs:eax],0x11223344
7350 This is fine, but slightly cumbersome (since it wastes an
7351 instruction and a register) if you already know the precise offset
7352 you are aiming at. The x86 architecture does allow 32-bit effective
7353 addresses to specify nothing but a 4-byte offset, so why shouldn't
7354 NASM be able to generate the best instruction for the purpose?
7356 It can. As in \k{mixjump}, you need only prefix the address with the
7357 \c{DWORD} keyword, and it will be forced to be a 32-bit address:
7359 \c mov dword [fs:dword my_offset],0x11223344
7361 Also as in \k{mixjump}, NASM is not fussy about whether the
7362 \c{DWORD} prefix comes before or after the segment override, so
7363 arguably a nicer-looking way to code the above instruction is
7365 \c mov dword [dword fs:my_offset],0x11223344
7367 Don't confuse the \c{DWORD} prefix \e{outside} the square brackets,
7368 which controls the size of the data stored at the address, with the
7369 one \c{inside} the square brackets which controls the length of the
7370 address itself. The two can quite easily be different:
7372 \c mov word [dword 0x12345678],0x9ABC
7374 This moves 16 bits of data to an address specified by a 32-bit
7377 You can also specify \c{WORD} or \c{DWORD} prefixes along with the
7378 \c{FAR} prefix to indirect far jumps or calls. For example:
7380 \c call dword far [fs:word 0x4321]
7382 This instruction contains an address specified by a 16-bit offset;
7383 it loads a 48-bit far pointer from that (16-bit segment and 32-bit
7384 offset), and calls that address.
7387 \H{mixother} Other Mixed-Size Instructions
7389 The other way you might want to access data might be using the
7390 string instructions (\c{LODSx}, \c{STOSx} and so on) or the
7391 \c{XLATB} instruction. These instructions, since they take no
7392 parameters, might seem to have no easy way to make them perform
7393 32-bit addressing when assembled in a 16-bit segment.
7395 This is the purpose of NASM's \i\c{a16}, \i\c{a32} and \i\c{a64} prefixes. If
7396 you are coding \c{LODSB} in a 16-bit segment but it is supposed to
7397 be accessing a string in a 32-bit segment, you should load the
7398 desired address into \c{ESI} and then code
7402 The prefix forces the addressing size to 32 bits, meaning that
7403 \c{LODSB} loads from \c{[DS:ESI]} instead of \c{[DS:SI]}. To access
7404 a string in a 16-bit segment when coding in a 32-bit one, the
7405 corresponding \c{a16} prefix can be used.
7407 The \c{a16}, \c{a32} and \c{a64} prefixes can be applied to any instruction
7408 in NASM's instruction table, but most of them can generate all the
7409 useful forms without them. The prefixes are necessary only for
7410 instructions with implicit addressing:
7411 \# \c{CMPSx} (\k{insCMPSB}),
7412 \# \c{SCASx} (\k{insSCASB}), \c{LODSx} (\k{insLODSB}), \c{STOSx}
7413 \# (\k{insSTOSB}), \c{MOVSx} (\k{insMOVSB}), \c{INSx} (\k{insINSB}),
7414 \# \c{OUTSx} (\k{insOUTSB}), and \c{XLATB} (\k{insXLATB}).
7415 \c{CMPSx}, \c{SCASx}, \c{LODSx}, \c{STOSx}, \c{MOVSx}, \c{INSx},
7416 \c{OUTSx}, and \c{XLATB}.
7418 various push and pop instructions (\c{PUSHA} and \c{POPF} as well as
7419 the more usual \c{PUSH} and \c{POP}) can accept \c{a16}, \c{a32} or \c{a64}
7420 prefixes to force a particular one of \c{SP}, \c{ESP} or \c{RSP} to be used
7421 as a stack pointer, in case the stack segment in use is a different
7422 size from the code segment.
7424 \c{PUSH} and \c{POP}, when applied to segment registers in 32-bit
7425 mode, also have the slightly odd behaviour that they push and pop 4
7426 bytes at a time, of which the top two are ignored and the bottom two
7427 give the value of the segment register being manipulated. To force
7428 the 16-bit behaviour of segment-register push and pop instructions,
7429 you can use the operand-size prefix \i\c{o16}:
7434 This code saves a doubleword of stack space by fitting two segment
7435 registers into the space which would normally be consumed by pushing
7438 (You can also use the \i\c{o32} prefix to force the 32-bit behaviour
7439 when in 16-bit mode, but this seems less useful.)
7442 \C{64bit} Writing 64-bit Code (Unix, Win64)
7444 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues involved when
7445 writing 64-bit code, to run under \i{Win64} or Unix. It covers how to
7446 write assembly code to interface with 64-bit C routines, and how to
7447 write position-independent code for shared libraries.
7449 All 64-bit code uses a flat memory model, since segmentation is not
7450 available in 64-bit mode. The one exception is the \c{FS} and \c{GS}
7451 registers, which still add their bases.
7453 Position independence in 64-bit mode is significantly simpler, since
7454 the processor supports \c{RIP}-relative addressing directly; see the
7455 \c{REL} keyword (\k{effaddr}). On most 64-bit platforms, it is
7456 probably desirable to make that the default, using the directive
7457 \c{DEFAULT REL} (\k{default}).
7459 64-bit programming is relatively similar to 32-bit programming, but
7460 of course pointers are 64 bits long; additionally, all existing
7461 platforms pass arguments in registers rather than on the stack.
7462 Furthermore, 64-bit platforms use SSE2 by default for floating point.
7463 Please see the ABI documentation for your platform.
7465 64-bit platforms differ in the sizes of the fundamental datatypes, not
7466 just from 32-bit platforms but from each other. If a specific size
7467 data type is desired, it is probably best to use the types defined in
7468 the Standard C header \c{<inttypes.h>}.
7470 In 64-bit mode, the default instruction size is still 32 bits. When
7471 loading a value into a 32-bit register (but not an 8- or 16-bit
7472 register), the upper 32 bits of the corresponding 64-bit register are
7475 \H{reg64} Register Names in 64-bit Mode
7477 NASM uses the following names for general-purpose registers in 64-bit
7478 mode, for 8-, 16-, 32- and 64-bit references, respecitively:
7480 \c AL/AH, CL/CH, DL/DH, BL/BH, SPL, BPL, SIL, DIL, R8B-R15B
7481 \c AX, CX, DX, BX, SP, BP, SI, DI, R8W-R15W
7482 \c EAX, ECX, EDX, EBX, ESP, EBP, ESI, EDI, R8D-R15D
7483 \c RAX, RCX, RDX, RBX, RSP, RBP, RSI, RDI, R8-R15
7485 This is consistent with the AMD documentation and most other
7486 assemblers. The Intel documentation, however, uses the names
7487 \c{R8L-R15L} for 8-bit references to the higher registers. It is
7488 possible to use those names by definiting them as macros; similarly,
7489 if one wants to use numeric names for the low 8 registers, define them
7490 as macros. The standard macro package \c{altreg} (see \k{pkg_altreg})
7491 can be used for this purpose.
7493 \H{id64} Immediates and Displacements in 64-bit Mode
7495 In 64-bit mode, immediates and displacements are generally only 32
7496 bits wide. NASM will therefore truncate most displacements and
7497 immediates to 32 bits.
7499 The only instruction which takes a full \i{64-bit immediate} is:
7503 NASM will produce this instruction whenever the programmer uses
7504 \c{MOV} with an immediate into a 64-bit register. If this is not
7505 desirable, simply specify the equivalent 32-bit register, which will
7506 be automatically zero-extended by the processor, or specify the
7507 immediate as \c{DWORD}:
7509 \c mov rax,foo ; 64-bit immediate
7510 \c mov rax,qword foo ; (identical)
7511 \c mov eax,foo ; 32-bit immediate, zero-extended
7512 \c mov rax,dword foo ; 32-bit immediate, sign-extended
7514 The length of these instructions are 10, 5 and 7 bytes, respectively.
7516 The only instructions which take a full \I{64-bit displacement}64-bit
7517 \e{displacement} is loading or storing, using \c{MOV}, \c{AL}, \c{AX},
7518 \c{EAX} or \c{RAX} (but no other registers) to an absolute 64-bit address.
7519 Since this is a relatively rarely used instruction (64-bit code generally uses
7520 relative addressing), the programmer has to explicitly declare the
7521 displacement size as \c{QWORD}:
7525 \c mov eax,[foo] ; 32-bit absolute disp, sign-extended
7526 \c mov eax,[a32 foo] ; 32-bit absolute disp, zero-extended
7527 \c mov eax,[qword foo] ; 64-bit absolute disp
7531 \c mov eax,[foo] ; 32-bit relative disp
7532 \c mov eax,[a32 foo] ; d:o, address truncated to 32 bits(!)
7533 \c mov eax,[qword foo] ; error
7534 \c mov eax,[abs qword foo] ; 64-bit absolute disp
7536 A sign-extended absolute displacement can access from -2 GB to +2 GB;
7537 a zero-extended absolute displacement can access from 0 to 4 GB.
7539 \H{unix64} Interfacing to 64-bit C Programs (Unix)
7541 On Unix, the 64-bit ABI is defined by the document:
7543 \W{http://www.nasm.us/links/unix64abi}\c{http://www.nasm.us/links/unix64abi}
7545 Although written for AT&T-syntax assembly, the concepts apply equally
7546 well for NASM-style assembly. What follows is a simplified summary.
7548 The first six integer arguments (from the left) are passed in \c{RDI},
7549 \c{RSI}, \c{RDX}, \c{RCX}, \c{R8}, and \c{R9}, in that order.
7550 Additional integer arguments are passed on the stack. These
7551 registers, plus \c{RAX}, \c{R10} and \c{R11} are destroyed by function
7552 calls, and thus are available for use by the function without saving.
7554 Integer return values are passed in \c{RAX} and \c{RDX}, in that order.
7556 Floating point is done using SSE registers, except for \c{long
7557 double}. Floating-point arguments are passed in \c{XMM0} to \c{XMM7};
7558 return is \c{XMM0} and \c{XMM1}. \c{long double} are passed on the
7559 stack, and returned in \c{ST0} and \c{ST1}.
7561 All SSE and x87 registers are destroyed by function calls.
7563 On 64-bit Unix, \c{long} is 64 bits.
7565 Integer and SSE register arguments are counted separately, so for the case of
7567 \c void foo(long a, double b, int c)
7569 \c{a} is passed in \c{RDI}, \c{b} in \c{XMM0}, and \c{c} in \c{ESI}.
7571 \H{win64} Interfacing to 64-bit C Programs (Win64)
7573 The Win64 ABI is described at:
7575 \W{http://www.nasm.us/links/win64abi}\c{http://www.nasm.us/links/win64abi}
7577 What follows is a simplified summary.
7579 The first four integer arguments are passed in \c{RCX}, \c{RDX},
7580 \c{R8} and \c{R9}, in that order. Additional integer arguments are
7581 passed on the stack. These registers, plus \c{RAX}, \c{R10} and
7582 \c{R11} are destroyed by function calls, and thus are available for
7583 use by the function without saving.
7585 Integer return values are passed in \c{RAX} only.
7587 Floating point is done using SSE registers, except for \c{long
7588 double}. Floating-point arguments are passed in \c{XMM0} to \c{XMM3};
7589 return is \c{XMM0} only.
7591 On Win64, \c{long} is 32 bits; \c{long long} or \c{_int64} is 64 bits.
7593 Integer and SSE register arguments are counted together, so for the case of
7595 \c void foo(long long a, double b, int c)
7597 \c{a} is passed in \c{RCX}, \c{b} in \c{XMM1}, and \c{c} in \c{R8D}.
7599 \C{trouble} Troubleshooting
7601 This chapter describes some of the common problems that users have
7602 been known to encounter with NASM, and answers them. It also gives
7603 instructions for reporting bugs in NASM if you find a difficulty
7604 that isn't listed here.
7607 \H{problems} Common Problems
7609 \S{inefficient} NASM Generates \i{Inefficient Code}
7611 We sometimes get `bug' reports about NASM generating inefficient, or
7612 even `wrong', code on instructions such as \c{ADD ESP,8}. This is a
7613 deliberate design feature, connected to predictability of output:
7614 NASM, on seeing \c{ADD ESP,8}, will generate the form of the
7615 instruction which leaves room for a 32-bit offset. You need to code
7616 \I\c{BYTE}\c{ADD ESP,BYTE 8} if you want the space-efficient form of
7617 the instruction. This isn't a bug, it's user error: if you prefer to
7618 have NASM produce the more efficient code automatically enable
7619 optimization with the \c{-O} option (see \k{opt-O}).
7622 \S{jmprange} My Jumps are Out of Range\I{out of range, jumps}
7624 Similarly, people complain that when they issue \i{conditional
7625 jumps} (which are \c{SHORT} by default) that try to jump too far,
7626 NASM reports `short jump out of range' instead of making the jumps
7629 This, again, is partly a predictability issue, but in fact has a
7630 more practical reason as well. NASM has no means of being told what
7631 type of processor the code it is generating will be run on; so it
7632 cannot decide for itself that it should generate \i\c{Jcc NEAR} type
7633 instructions, because it doesn't know that it's working for a 386 or
7634 above. Alternatively, it could replace the out-of-range short
7635 \c{JNE} instruction with a very short \c{JE} instruction that jumps
7636 over a \c{JMP NEAR}; this is a sensible solution for processors
7637 below a 386, but hardly efficient on processors which have good
7638 branch prediction \e{and} could have used \c{JNE NEAR} instead. So,
7639 once again, it's up to the user, not the assembler, to decide what
7640 instructions should be generated. See \k{opt-O}.
7643 \S{proborg} \i\c{ORG} Doesn't Work
7645 People writing \i{boot sector} programs in the \c{bin} format often
7646 complain that \c{ORG} doesn't work the way they'd like: in order to
7647 place the \c{0xAA55} signature word at the end of a 512-byte boot
7648 sector, people who are used to MASM tend to code
7652 \c ; some boot sector code
7657 This is not the intended use of the \c{ORG} directive in NASM, and
7658 will not work. The correct way to solve this problem in NASM is to
7659 use the \i\c{TIMES} directive, like this:
7663 \c ; some boot sector code
7665 \c TIMES 510-($-$$) DB 0
7668 The \c{TIMES} directive will insert exactly enough zero bytes into
7669 the output to move the assembly point up to 510. This method also
7670 has the advantage that if you accidentally fill your boot sector too
7671 full, NASM will catch the problem at assembly time and report it, so
7672 you won't end up with a boot sector that you have to disassemble to
7673 find out what's wrong with it.
7676 \S{probtimes} \i\c{TIMES} Doesn't Work
7678 The other common problem with the above code is people who write the
7683 by reasoning that \c{$} should be a pure number, just like 510, so
7684 the difference between them is also a pure number and can happily be
7687 NASM is a \e{modular} assembler: the various component parts are
7688 designed to be easily separable for re-use, so they don't exchange
7689 information unnecessarily. In consequence, the \c{bin} output
7690 format, even though it has been told by the \c{ORG} directive that
7691 the \c{.text} section should start at 0, does not pass that
7692 information back to the expression evaluator. So from the
7693 evaluator's point of view, \c{$} isn't a pure number: it's an offset
7694 from a section base. Therefore the difference between \c{$} and 510
7695 is also not a pure number, but involves a section base. Values
7696 involving section bases cannot be passed as arguments to \c{TIMES}.
7698 The solution, as in the previous section, is to code the \c{TIMES}
7701 \c TIMES 510-($-$$) DB 0
7703 in which \c{$} and \c{$$} are offsets from the same section base,
7704 and so their difference is a pure number. This will solve the
7705 problem and generate sensible code.
7708 \H{bugs} \i{Bugs}\I{reporting bugs}
7710 We have never yet released a version of NASM with any \e{known}
7711 bugs. That doesn't usually stop there being plenty we didn't know
7712 about, though. Any that you find should be reported firstly via the
7714 \W{http://www.nasm.us/}\c{http://www.nasm.us/}
7715 (click on "Bug Tracker"), or if that fails then through one of the
7716 contacts in \k{contact}.
7718 Please read \k{qstart} first, and don't report the bug if it's
7719 listed in there as a deliberate feature. (If you think the feature
7720 is badly thought out, feel free to send us reasons why you think it
7721 should be changed, but don't just send us mail saying `This is a
7722 bug' if the documentation says we did it on purpose.) Then read
7723 \k{problems}, and don't bother reporting the bug if it's listed
7726 If you do report a bug, \e{please} give us all of the following
7729 \b What operating system you're running NASM under. DOS, Linux,
7730 NetBSD, Win16, Win32, VMS (I'd be impressed), whatever.
7732 \b If you're running NASM under DOS or Win32, tell us whether you've
7733 compiled your own executable from the DOS source archive, or whether
7734 you were using the standard distribution binaries out of the
7735 archive. If you were using a locally built executable, try to
7736 reproduce the problem using one of the standard binaries, as this
7737 will make it easier for us to reproduce your problem prior to fixing
7740 \b Which version of NASM you're using, and exactly how you invoked
7741 it. Give us the precise command line, and the contents of the
7742 \c{NASMENV} environment variable if any.
7744 \b Which versions of any supplementary programs you're using, and
7745 how you invoked them. If the problem only becomes visible at link
7746 time, tell us what linker you're using, what version of it you've
7747 got, and the exact linker command line. If the problem involves
7748 linking against object files generated by a compiler, tell us what
7749 compiler, what version, and what command line or options you used.
7750 (If you're compiling in an IDE, please try to reproduce the problem
7751 with the command-line version of the compiler.)
7753 \b If at all possible, send us a NASM source file which exhibits the
7754 problem. If this causes copyright problems (e.g. you can only
7755 reproduce the bug in restricted-distribution code) then bear in mind
7756 the following two points: firstly, we guarantee that any source code
7757 sent to us for the purposes of debugging NASM will be used \e{only}
7758 for the purposes of debugging NASM, and that we will delete all our
7759 copies of it as soon as we have found and fixed the bug or bugs in
7760 question; and secondly, we would prefer \e{not} to be mailed large
7761 chunks of code anyway. The smaller the file, the better. A
7762 three-line sample file that does nothing useful \e{except}
7763 demonstrate the problem is much easier to work with than a
7764 fully fledged ten-thousand-line program. (Of course, some errors
7765 \e{do} only crop up in large files, so this may not be possible.)
7767 \b A description of what the problem actually \e{is}. `It doesn't
7768 work' is \e{not} a helpful description! Please describe exactly what
7769 is happening that shouldn't be, or what isn't happening that should.
7770 Examples might be: `NASM generates an error message saying Line 3
7771 for an error that's actually on Line 5'; `NASM generates an error
7772 message that I believe it shouldn't be generating at all'; `NASM
7773 fails to generate an error message that I believe it \e{should} be
7774 generating'; `the object file produced from this source code crashes
7775 my linker'; `the ninth byte of the output file is 66 and I think it
7776 should be 77 instead'.
7778 \b If you believe the output file from NASM to be faulty, send it to
7779 us. That allows us to determine whether our own copy of NASM
7780 generates the same file, or whether the problem is related to
7781 portability issues between our development platforms and yours. We
7782 can handle binary files mailed to us as MIME attachments, uuencoded,
7783 and even BinHex. Alternatively, we may be able to provide an FTP
7784 site you can upload the suspect files to; but mailing them is easier
7787 \b Any other information or data files that might be helpful. If,
7788 for example, the problem involves NASM failing to generate an object
7789 file while TASM can generate an equivalent file without trouble,
7790 then send us \e{both} object files, so we can see what TASM is doing
7791 differently from us.
7794 \A{ndisasm} \i{Ndisasm}
7796 The Netwide Disassembler, NDISASM
7798 \H{ndisintro} Introduction
7801 The Netwide Disassembler is a small companion program to the Netwide
7802 Assembler, NASM. It seemed a shame to have an x86 assembler,
7803 complete with a full instruction table, and not make as much use of
7804 it as possible, so here's a disassembler which shares the
7805 instruction table (and some other bits of code) with NASM.
7807 The Netwide Disassembler does nothing except to produce
7808 disassemblies of \e{binary} source files. NDISASM does not have any
7809 understanding of object file formats, like \c{objdump}, and it will
7810 not understand \c{DOS .EXE} files like \c{debug} will. It just
7814 \H{ndisstart} Getting Started: Installation
7816 See \k{install} for installation instructions. NDISASM, like NASM,
7817 has a \c{man page} which you may want to put somewhere useful, if you
7818 are on a Unix system.
7821 \H{ndisrun} Running NDISASM
7823 To disassemble a file, you will typically use a command of the form
7825 \c ndisasm -b {16|32|64} filename
7827 NDISASM can disassemble 16-, 32- or 64-bit code equally easily,
7828 provided of course that you remember to specify which it is to work
7829 with. If no \i\c{-b} switch is present, NDISASM works in 16-bit mode
7830 by default. The \i\c{-u} switch (for USE32) also invokes 32-bit mode.
7832 Two more command line options are \i\c{-r} which reports the version
7833 number of NDISASM you are running, and \i\c{-h} which gives a short
7834 summary of command line options.
7837 \S{ndiscom} COM Files: Specifying an Origin
7839 To disassemble a \c{DOS .COM} file correctly, a disassembler must assume
7840 that the first instruction in the file is loaded at address \c{0x100},
7841 rather than at zero. NDISASM, which assumes by default that any file
7842 you give it is loaded at zero, will therefore need to be informed of
7845 The \i\c{-o} option allows you to declare a different origin for the
7846 file you are disassembling. Its argument may be expressed in any of
7847 the NASM numeric formats: decimal by default, if it begins with `\c{$}'
7848 or `\c{0x}' or ends in `\c{H}' it's \c{hex}, if it ends in `\c{Q}' it's
7849 \c{octal}, and if it ends in `\c{B}' it's \c{binary}.
7851 Hence, to disassemble a \c{.COM} file:
7853 \c ndisasm -o100h filename.com
7858 \S{ndissync} Code Following Data: Synchronisation
7860 Suppose you are disassembling a file which contains some data which
7861 isn't machine code, and \e{then} contains some machine code. NDISASM
7862 will faithfully plough through the data section, producing machine
7863 instructions wherever it can (although most of them will look
7864 bizarre, and some may have unusual prefixes, e.g. `\c{FS OR AX,0x240A}'),
7865 and generating `DB' instructions ever so often if it's totally stumped.
7866 Then it will reach the code section.
7868 Supposing NDISASM has just finished generating a strange machine
7869 instruction from part of the data section, and its file position is
7870 now one byte \e{before} the beginning of the code section. It's
7871 entirely possible that another spurious instruction will get
7872 generated, starting with the final byte of the data section, and
7873 then the correct first instruction in the code section will not be
7874 seen because the starting point skipped over it. This isn't really
7877 To avoid this, you can specify a `\i\c{synchronisation}' point, or indeed
7878 as many synchronisation points as you like (although NDISASM can
7879 only handle 2147483647 sync points internally). The definition of a sync
7880 point is this: NDISASM guarantees to hit sync points exactly during
7881 disassembly. If it is thinking about generating an instruction which
7882 would cause it to jump over a sync point, it will discard that
7883 instruction and output a `\c{db}' instead. So it \e{will} start
7884 disassembly exactly from the sync point, and so you \e{will} see all
7885 the instructions in your code section.
7887 Sync points are specified using the \i\c{-s} option: they are measured
7888 in terms of the program origin, not the file position. So if you
7889 want to synchronize after 32 bytes of a \c{.COM} file, you would have to
7892 \c ndisasm -o100h -s120h file.com
7896 \c ndisasm -o100h -s20h file.com
7898 As stated above, you can specify multiple sync markers if you need
7899 to, just by repeating the \c{-s} option.
7902 \S{ndisisync} Mixed Code and Data: Automatic (Intelligent) Synchronisation
7905 Suppose you are disassembling the boot sector of a \c{DOS} floppy (maybe
7906 it has a virus, and you need to understand the virus so that you
7907 know what kinds of damage it might have done you). Typically, this
7908 will contain a \c{JMP} instruction, then some data, then the rest of the
7909 code. So there is a very good chance of NDISASM being \e{misaligned}
7910 when the data ends and the code begins. Hence a sync point is
7913 On the other hand, why should you have to specify the sync point
7914 manually? What you'd do in order to find where the sync point would
7915 be, surely, would be to read the \c{JMP} instruction, and then to use
7916 its target address as a sync point. So can NDISASM do that for you?
7918 The answer, of course, is yes: using either of the synonymous
7919 switches \i\c{-a} (for automatic sync) or \i\c{-i} (for intelligent
7920 sync) will enable \c{auto-sync} mode. Auto-sync mode automatically
7921 generates a sync point for any forward-referring PC-relative jump or
7922 call instruction that NDISASM encounters. (Since NDISASM is one-pass,
7923 if it encounters a PC-relative jump whose target has already been
7924 processed, there isn't much it can do about it...)
7926 Only PC-relative jumps are processed, since an absolute jump is
7927 either through a register (in which case NDISASM doesn't know what
7928 the register contains) or involves a segment address (in which case
7929 the target code isn't in the same segment that NDISASM is working
7930 in, and so the sync point can't be placed anywhere useful).
7932 For some kinds of file, this mechanism will automatically put sync
7933 points in all the right places, and save you from having to place
7934 any sync points manually. However, it should be stressed that
7935 auto-sync mode is \e{not} guaranteed to catch all the sync points, and
7936 you may still have to place some manually.
7938 Auto-sync mode doesn't prevent you from declaring manual sync
7939 points: it just adds automatically generated ones to the ones you
7940 provide. It's perfectly feasible to specify \c{-i} \e{and} some \c{-s}
7943 Another caveat with auto-sync mode is that if, by some unpleasant
7944 fluke, something in your data section should disassemble to a
7945 PC-relative call or jump instruction, NDISASM may obediently place a
7946 sync point in a totally random place, for example in the middle of
7947 one of the instructions in your code section. So you may end up with
7948 a wrong disassembly even if you use auto-sync. Again, there isn't
7949 much I can do about this. If you have problems, you'll have to use
7950 manual sync points, or use the \c{-k} option (documented below) to
7951 suppress disassembly of the data area.
7954 \S{ndisother} Other Options
7956 The \i\c{-e} option skips a header on the file, by ignoring the first N
7957 bytes. This means that the header is \e{not} counted towards the
7958 disassembly offset: if you give \c{-e10 -o10}, disassembly will start
7959 at byte 10 in the file, and this will be given offset 10, not 20.
7961 The \i\c{-k} option is provided with two comma-separated numeric
7962 arguments, the first of which is an assembly offset and the second
7963 is a number of bytes to skip. This \e{will} count the skipped bytes
7964 towards the assembly offset: its use is to suppress disassembly of a
7965 data section which wouldn't contain anything you wanted to see
7969 \H{ndisbugs} Bugs and Improvements
7971 There are no known bugs. However, any you find, with patches if
7972 possible, should be sent to
7973 \W{mailto:nasm-bugs@lists.sourceforge.net}\c{nasm-bugs@lists.sourceforge.net}, or to the
7975 \W{http://www.nasm.us/}\c{http://www.nasm.us/}
7976 and we'll try to fix them. Feel free to send contributions and
7977 new features as well.
7979 \A{inslist} \i{Instruction List}
7981 \H{inslistintro} Introduction
7983 The following sections show the instructions which NASM currently supports. For each
7984 instruction, there is a separate entry for each supported addressing mode. The third
7985 column shows the processor type in which the instruction was introduced and,
7986 when appropriate, one or more usage flags.
7990 \A{changelog} \i{NASM Version History}